anymedia access system - nokia networks · pdf fileanymedia® access system (24 channel)...

AnyMedia® Access System(24 Channel)Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal

Issue 6March 2007

363-211-128

Copyright ©2007 Lucent Technologies. All Rights Reserved

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of Lucent Technologies and the business management owner of the material.

NoticeEvery effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.

TrademarksAll trademarks and service marks specified herein are owned by their respective companies.

Ordering InformationSee “How to Order This Document (xxv)” .

Trademarks4TEL is a registered trademark of Teradyne, Inc.

5ESS is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

ACCUNET is a service mark of AT&T

Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated

Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated

ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.

AnyMedia is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

Business OfficeXchange and BOX are trademarks of VINA Technologies, Inc.

CLASS is a service mark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

ClearReach is a trademark of Lucent Technologies

Common Language is a registered trademark and CLEI, CLLI, CLCI, and CLFI are trademarks of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

ConnectReach and ConnectReach Plus are trademarks of Lucent Technologies

Datapath is a trademark of CAE Electronics

DMS is a trademark of Nortel Networks

EWSD is a registered trademark of Siemens

FAST is a trademark of Lucent Technologies

ForeRunner is a registered trademark of Fore Systems, Inc.

HiGain is a registered trademark of PairGain Technologies, Inc.

Internet Explorer is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation

LGX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

LINEAGE is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

Local Call Routing and LCR are trademarks of VINA Technologies, Inc.

LoopCare is a trademark of Tollgrade Communications, Inc.

MainStreetXpress is a trademark of Newbridge Networks Corporation

MCU is a registered trademark of Tollgrade Communications, Inc.

Micro-Bank is a registered trademark of Tollgrade Communications, Inc.

Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation

NGRTH is a trademark of General Signal Corporation

NMA is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

PacketStar is a trademark of Lucent Technologies

PairGain is a registered trademark of PairGain Technologies, Inc.

SLC is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

Solitare is a trademark of PairGain Technologies, Inc.

SPOTS is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

SPQ is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies

SWITCH is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Tau-Tron is a registered trademark of General Signal Corporation

Telcordia is a trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

TIRKS is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Tollgrade is a registered trademark of Tollgrade Communications, Inc.

Total Reach is a registered trademark of ADTRAN, Inc.

UL is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited

US Sprint is a registered trademark of US Sprint Communications Company Limited

Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation

Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows 2000 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation

Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation

WordPad is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation

Quality Management SystemThe Quality Management System (QMS) for Lucent Technologies’ AnyMedia® Access Systems R&D organizations has been registered to IS0 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas (DNV) since June 1993. ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide. It is a model for quality assurance in design, development, production, installation, and servicing.

Technical supportTechnical support is available for AnyMedia Access System indoor/outdoor applications, for AnyMedia Access System 800, and for AnyMedia Element Manager (Navis AnyMedia Element Manager).

AnyMedia service is complemented by a full range of services available to support planning, maintaining and operating your system. Applications testing, network integration, and upgrade conversion support is available.

Lucent Technologies service personnel will troubleshoot field problems 24 h a day over the phone and on site (if necessary) based on Lucent Technologies service contracts by Local/Regional Customer Support (LCS/RCS) and by Remote Technical Support (RTS).

Contacting your Lucent Technologies support: For Europe call the International Customer Management Center (ICMC): +353 1692 4579 or call the toll free number: 00 800 00 58 2368. For Asia Pacific, Caribbean and Latin America Region, Saudi Arabia, Middle East and Africa call the local Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support Team.

How Are We Doing?

Document Title: AnyMedia® Access System(24 Channel)Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal

Document No.: 363-211-128 Issue No.: Issue 6 Date: March 2007Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value in helping us to improve our documentation.

1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document:

❒ Improve the overview/introduction ❒ Make it more concise/brief❒ Improve the table of contents ❒ Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials❒ Improve the organization ❒ Add more troubleshooting information❒ Include more figures ❒ Make it less technical❒ Add more examples ❒ Add more/better quick reference aids❒ Add more detail ❒ Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. What did you like most about this document?

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:Name: _______________________________ Telephone Number: (_____)_________________Company/Organization: ______________________________ Date: _____________________Address:_____________________________________________________________________When you have completed this form, please Fax it to: +49 911 526 3545.

Excellent Good Fair Poor

Ease of UseClarityCompletenessAccuracyOrganizationAppearanceExamplesIllustrationOverall Satisfaction

363-211-128Traditional DLC Interfaces

Table of Contents

About This Document■ Overview xvii■ Conventions Used in This Document xx■ Related Documentation xxii■ How to Order This Document xxv■ How to Comment on This Document xxvi

1 Introduction

2 COT Configurations■ Overview 2-1■ COT Configuration Options 2-2■ Central Office Bay Arrangements 2-3

3 Product Description■ Overview 3-1■ COT FAST Shelf Description 3-2■ AnyMedia COT Description 3-7■ Choosing AnyMedia COT Shelf Equipment Options 3-9■ Circuit Packs Used in the AnyMedia COT FAST Shelf 3-10■ Alarm Test Unit 3-11■ Application Pack—PRCOINCS LPA150 3-13■ Application Pack—COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 3-16■ Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System 3-21

4 Traditional DLC Interfaces■ Overview 4-1■ TR-08, INA VB and UC Interfaces 4-2■ OAM&P Interfaces 4-8■ Management Interface 4-10■ External Interfaces for Circuit Testing 4-164-16

4-104-84-24-1

3-213-163-133-113-103-93-73-23-1

2-32-22-1

xxvixxvxxiixx

xvii

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 vii


■ Power and Miscellaneous Alarm Input Interface 4-17■ CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and Alarm Cutoff 4-18

5 OAM&P For Traditional DLC Services■ Overview 5-1■ Configuration Management 5-2■ Configuration Management—Software Management 5-3■ Configuration Management—Service Activation 5-4■ Configuration Management—Provisioning 5-10■ Configuration Management—Line Termination Provisioning 5-11■ Configuration Management—Application Pack Provisioning 5-16■ Configuration Management—Default POTS Line Loss 5-22■ Configuration Management—Synchronization Provisioning 5-25■ Fault Management 5-29■ Fault Management—Maintenance 5-30■ Fault Management—Alarms and Events 5-33■ Fault Management—Protection Switching 5-39■ Fault Management—Testing 5-42■ Performance Management 5-44

6 System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services■ Overview 6-1■ System Capacity 6-2■ Growth Scenarios 6-6■ Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INA Telephony

Configurations 6-10■ System Installation Planning 6-13■ Engineering the LAN Connection 6-14■ Engineering the ROC Connection 6-16■ COT Default Configuration Provisioning 6-21■ Default System Parameter Provisioning Selection 6-28■ COT Alarm Engineering 6-35■ DS1 Feeders 6-44■ Synchronization and Timing 6-47■ Management Interface PC Requirements 6-50■ Product Reliability 6-526-52

6-506-476-446-356-286-216-166-146-136-10

6-66-26-1

5-445-425-395-335-305-295-255-225-165-115-10

5-45-35-25-1

4-184-17

viii March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


■ COT FAST Shelf Powering 6-53■ COT Testing 6-58■ Ordering 6-67■ Engineering Work Order 6-68■ Part 1 — Preliminary Information 6-69■ Part 2 — Physical Installation (Bay) 6-72■ Part 3 — Turn-Up Procedures 6-73■ Part 4 — System Activation Procedures (SAs) 6-85■ Part 5 — Operation Procedures (OPs) 6-86■ Part 6 — Apparatus Codes 6-88

A Floor Plan Data Sheets■ Overview A-1

List of Acronyms AC-1

Glossary GL-1

Index I-1I-1

GL-1

AC-1

A-1

6-886-866-856-736-726-696-686-676-586-53

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 ix


x March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


List of Figures

0 About This Document

1 Introduction■ Figure 1-1. Typical Universal AnyMedia Access System Application 1-3■ Figure 1-2. Typical AnyMedia COT Unbundling Application 1-4■ Figure 1-3. AnyMedia COT in Universal Concentrator (UC) Configuration 1-6■ Figure 1-4. COT FAST Shelf with Optional ATU and MDS2 Shelf 1-10

2 COT Configurations■ Figure 2-1. Typical 7-Foot AnyMedia COT Bay Arrangement 2-4■ Figure 2-2. Alternative AnyMedia COT 7-Foot Bay Arrangement 2-5■ Figure 2-3. Rear Mount COT Bay Arrangement 2-6

3 Product Description■ Figure 3-1. AnyMedia Access System COT FAST Shelf (Doors Not Shown)3-3■ Figure 3-2. COT FAST Shelf Arrangement 3-5■ Figure 3-3. COT FAST Shelf Functional Block Diagram 3-7■ Figure 3-4. Alarm Test Unit (ATU) 3-12■ Figure 3-5. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Functional Block Diagram 3-14■ Figure 3-6. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Faceplate 3-15■ Figure 3-7. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Functional Block Diagram 3-17■ Figure 3-8. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Faceplate 3-19

4 Traditional DLC Interfaces■ Figure 4-1. FAST Shelf VCOT and VB POTS Access Services 4-2■ Figure 4-2. TR-08 Interfaces 4-5■ Figure 4-3. AnyMedia Universal Concentrator

(Typical Configuration UC VCOT/VRT) 4-7■ Figure 4-4. COT Operations Gateway 4-9■ Figure 4-5. GSI Representation of the COT FAST Shelf and ATU 4-11■ Figure 4-6. Network Maintenance Manager Interface 4-124-12

4-114-94-7

4-54-2

3-193-173-153-143-123-73-5

2-62-52-4

1-101-61-41-3

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xi


■ Figure 4-7. Pull-Down Menu for Selecting GSI Operations 4-12■ Figure 4-8. TL1 Commands Window 4-13■ Figure 4-9. A Graphical Representation of the Alarms Collected Using

the Network Maintenance Manager 4-15

5 OAM&P For Traditional DLC Services■ Figure 5-1. Conceptual Diagram of Cross-Connects within the

AnyMedia Access System 5-5■ Figure 5-2. Conceptual Diagram of TR-08 VCOTs 5-6■ Figure 5-3. Conceptual Diagram of INA VBs 5-6■ Figure 5-4. Conceptual Diagram of Single UC VCOT 5-7■ Figure 5-5. Access Identifier Codes for Physical IODS1 Ports 5-8■ Figure 5-6. Conceptual Diagram of Subscriber Ports in the A

nyMedia Access System 5-9■ Figure 5-1. Provisioning Data for a TR-08 POTS Subscriber Line 5-14■ Figure 5-1. TL1 Provisioning Parameters for

T0 Objects—COT/RT FAST Shelf 5-21■ Figure 5-1. Externally Timed/Line Timed Configuration A 5-26■ Figure 5-2. Externally Timed/Line Timed Configuration B 5-26■ Figure 5-3. Externally Timed/Externally Timed Configuration 5-27

6 System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services■ Figure 6-1. FAST Shelf Physical Layout 6-3■ Figure 6-2. AnyMedia Access System with Mixed VCOT and

VB Configuration 6-11■ Figure 6-3. Network Configuration Including ROC Channels 6-17■ Figure 6-4. Nailed-up Connection Network Configuration 6-18■ Figure 6-5. Hair-pinned Connection Configuration 6-18■ Figure 6-6. ROCs Over INA Connection to the Router 6-19■ Figure 6-7. ROCs Over INA Connection via the DCS 6-19■ Figure 6-8. Example of an RT Assignment of Miscellaneous Alarms

Using the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 Command on TR-08 data link 6-36■ Figure 6-9. COT Assignment of Miscellaneous Alarms Using the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 Command on TR-08 data link 6-39

■ Figure 6-10. Miscellaneous Alarms at COT FAST Shelf with DTP101, DTP102, DTP103 or DTP104 CTU 6-40

■ Figure 6-11. Overview of Miscellaneous Alarms Mappings at COT and RT via TR-08 data link 6-426-42

6-40

6-39

6-36

6-196-196-186-186-176-11

6-3

5-275-265-265-21

5-145-9

5-85-75-65-65-5

4-15

4-134-12

xii March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


■ Figure 6-12. Overview of Miscellaneous Alarms Mappings at COT and RT via UC data link 6-43

■ Figure 6-13. Maximum DS1 Line Distance for Universal AnyMedia Access System versus Delay Contribution by Other Transmission-Related Equipment 6-46

■ Figure 6-14. Typical Synchronization Network for the COT FAST Shelf 6-49■ Figure 6-15. FAST Shelf Fusing and Test Points with Replaceable

FCMs (Duplicated and Direct Power) 6-56■ Figure 6-16. PGTC Testing of FAST Shelf Lines on Universal Systems

with Metallic Test Pair 6-60■ Figure 6-17. PGTC Testing of FAST Shelf Lines on Universal Systems

with RTU-2 6-61■ Figure 6-18. Using an AnyMedia COT in an INA Configuration to

Provide a Digital Bypass Pair 6-63■ Figure 6-19. TR-465-Compatible (PGTC-Type) Circuit Testing Using

Tollgrade Micro-Bank Systems 6-64■ Figure 6-20. TR-465-Compatible (PGTC-Type) Circuit Testing with

Tollgrade MCU-5405 CU in an RT MDS2 Shelf 6-65■ Figure 6-21. Typical Connections of a TR-465-Compatible

(PGTC-Type) Locally Switched Services RTU-2 to an AnyMedia Access System 6-66

A Floor Plan Data Sheets■ Figure A-1. Floor Plan Data Sheet - COT - Sheet 1 of 4 A-2■ Figure A-2. Floor Plan Data Sheet - COT - Sheet 2 of 4 A-3■ Figure A-3. Floor Plan Data Sheet - COT - Sheet 3 of 4 A-4■ Figure A-4. Floor Plan Data Sheet - COT - Sheet 4 of 4 A-5A-5

A-4A-3A-2

6-66

6-65

6-64

6-63

6-61

6-60

6-56

6-496-46

6-43

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xiii


xiv March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


List of Tables

0 About This Document

1 Introduction

2 COT Configurations

3 Product Description■ Table 3-1. Fan or Baffle Shelf Dimensions 3-4■ Table 3-2. COT FAST Shelf Dimensions 3-4■ Table 3-3. Circuit Pack and AP Dimensions 3-6■ Table 3-4. Available COT FAST Shelf and Additional Services Options 3-9■ Table 3-5. ATU LED Indicators 3-12■ Table 3-6. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Faceplate LEDs 3-16■ Table 3-7. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Faceplate LEDs 3-20■ Table 3-8. COT (FAST & MDS2) and RT (FAST & MDS2) CU/AP

Combinations 3-21■ Table 3-9. MDS2 Channel Units 3-24

4 Traditional DLC Interfaces

5 OAM&P For Traditional DLC Services■ Table 5-1. Mapping of GSFN Codes to APs and the ROC 5-18■ Table 5-1. COMDAC Packs Protect 5-40■ Table 5-2. IODS1 Packs Protect 5-41■ Table 5-3. Synchronization Sources Protect 5-41

6 System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services■ Table 6-1. Signals on the RJ-45 and Ethernet DB-9 Connectors 6-14■ Table 6-2. Signals on the Crossover Cable 6-15■ Table 6-3. Default T0 Cross-Connections for ED-VEQPT Command 6-246-24

6-156-14

5-415-415-405-18

3-243-21

3-203-163-123-93-63-43-4

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xv


■ Table 6-4. Default T1 Cross-Connections for ED-VEQPT Command 6-25■ Table 6-5. Default T0 Cross-Connections for ED-VEQPT Command 6-26■ Table 6-6. Default T1 Cross-Connections for ED-VEQPT Command 6-26■ Table 6-7. Default RT Environmental Alarm Mappings at the COT 6-27■ Table 6-8. Default IP Addresses for Communications Interfaces 6-29■ Table 6-9. Alarm Severity Defaults 6-31■ Table 6-10. Miscellaneous Input Environmental Alarm Default Severities6-34■ Table 6-11. Alarm Types 6-37■ Table 6-12. Powering FAST Shelf with Duplicated Power via

Replaceable FCM 6-54■ Table 6-13. Powering FAST Shelf with Direct Power via Replaceable

FCM 6-54■ Table 6-14. Function/Apparatus Code Table 6-88

A Floor Plan Data Sheets

6-886-54

6-54

6-37

6-316-296-276-266-266-25

xvi March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

About This Document 0

Overview

Purpose This Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal (hereinafter referred to as the COT feature supplement), provides the following information for the central office terminal (COT):

• An overview of the system

• Specific information about the features, benefits, applications, and operation of the product

• Configuration and engineering information for planning purposes.

Intended audience Customers who use this COT feature supplement include the following:

• Standardization groups

• Product evaluators

• Network planners

• Engineers.

Issue This is Issue 6 of the AnyMedia® Access System (24 channel), Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal.

Reason for issue The COT feature supplement is being reissued to include information about the following new features:

• COT software support by COM103.

March 2007 xvii

Overview363-211-128

Traditional DLC Interfaces

• Minor editorial modifications

Content This issue of the COT feature supplement contains the following:

• An overview of the AnyMedia Access System

• A description of the COT

• Applications, services and interfaces of the COT

• Operations of the COT

• Planning and engineering information for the COT

• Table of contents, acronym list, glossary, and index for the document, which help the reader find desired information quickly and easily

• A comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document.

For ordering information, see the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide, code 363-211-125.

Document organization

This document has the following organization:

• About this DocumentDefines the purpose of the document and the intended audience. Also includes topics about the conventions used in the document, related documentation, how to order documents, and how to comment on this document.

• Chapter 1, IntroductionDescribes the COT features and benefits and the types of applications and services for which the COT is uniquely suited.

• Chapter 2, COT ConfigurationsDescribes the COT configurations for use in central office bay arrangements and in single system arrangements.

• Chapter 3, Product DescriptionDescribes the components of the COT and the application packs available.

• Chapter 4, Traditional DLC InterfacesDefines the interfaces of the COT, including TR-08 virtual remote terminals (VRTs), integrated network access (INA), local and remote local area network (LAN) access, the UCC feature, the TL1 system interface (TL1SI), personal computer (PC) graphical system interface (GSI), and testing interfaces for traditional DLC services.

xviii March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

363-211-128OverviewTraditional DLC Interfaces

• Chapter 5, OAM&P For Traditional DLC ServicesDescribes the methods used to perform configuration management, which includes memory administration, provisioning and inventory; fault management, which includes maintenance and testing; performance management; and security management of the traditional DLC services of the system.

• Chapter 6, System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC ServicesDescribes the techniques used to incorporate the COT into a telecommunications network, which includes capacities, traffic engineering and management, synchronization, system powering, and circuit testing for traditional DLC services.

• List of AcronymsLists the acronyms used to replace the longer expressions the acronyms represent.

• GlossaryDefines terms that may be unfamiliar to the user.

• IndexLists in alphabetical order the specific subject information in the document.

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xix

Conventions Used in This Document363-211-128


Conventions Used in This Document

Terms used The following are terms used in this APOG that may have a different meaning than the general or common use of the term.

• In the AnyMedia Access System, the term access means that the system provides the primary service interface for the customer to enter the network.

• UC stands for AnyMedia Universal Concentrator.

• Digital signal, level 1 (DS1) feeder refers to the 1.544 megabits per second (Mbps) digital feeder interfaces of the telephony system that carry 24 digital signal, level 0 (DS0) channels.

• Digital signal cross-connect, level 1 (DSX-1) metallic feeder from line interface units (IODS1 circuit packs) provides an interface to an external synchronous optical network (SONET) multiplexer or external span protection and repeater shelves for T1 feeder applications.

• Traditional DLC services refer to traditional telephony services, which include POTS, coin, ISDN, and two-wire locally switched, nonswitched, and nonlocally switched services.

• Special services refer to two-wire and four-wire nonswitched and nonlocally switched special services.

• VF is used generically to define POTS, two-wire and four-wire special services, ISDN, DDS, enhanced business services (EBS) P-Phone, and digital bypass pair and DC alarm circuits to an existing DLC system. VF growth is used generically to define the growth or addition of these services.

• VF cables refer generically to the tip/ring pair cables that attach to the faceplates of all APs.

• MDS2 feature refers to the MDS2 shelf. For more information, refer to the AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations, code 363-211-106.

Acronyms and abbreviations

In the first two chapters, acronyms are spelled out in lower case letters the first time they are used. Acronyms are also expanded if the section topic is specifically about the acronym. All acronyms may be found in the Acronym list located in the back of the document.

Initial caps are used only when the acronym represents a system (e.g., Switched Access Remote Test System [SARTS]) or when used in a heading. If the acronym is a trademark, it will not be spelled out.

xx March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

363-211-128Conventions Used in This DocumentTraditional DLC Interfaces

Commands AnyMedia Access System TL1 command names are displayed in constant-width font and are uppercase (e.g., RTRV-COND).

Trademarks The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page. Trademarks of Lucent Technologies and other companies are in italics, and the trademarks modify a noun (e.g., the system name contains a registered trademark, AnyMedia Access System). A trademark is not treated as an acronym (it is not spelled out or expanded).

Lucent Technologies trademarks 0

Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark (® ) or trademark (™) symbol the first time the trademarks are used in the text.

Trademarks of other companies 0

The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the first time the trademarks are used in the text.

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xxi

Related Documentation363-211-128


Related Documentation

Document list, packaging, and formats

The following documentation is available for the AnyMedia Access System:

Available on the Web 0• AnyMedia Access System Documents

— 363-211-125, AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guidehttp://www.lucent8.com/library/AnyMediaOrderingGuide.pdf

Available on CD-ROM 0

363-211-103, AnyMedia® Access System, Documentation, which is a CD-ROM that contains the following documents in various formats:

• AnyMedia Access System Documents

— AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG) (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—Integrated Access Terminal (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide (in PDF format)— AnyMedia® Access System, Installation Manual (in PDF format)— AnyMedia® Access System, Commands and Procedures (363-211-100,

in HTML format, also includes PDFs of selected procedures)— AnyMedia® Access System, ConnectReach™ Terminal User’s Guide (in

PDF format)— AnyMedia® Access System, ConnectReach Plus™ Terminal User’s

Guide (in PDF format)

• Cabinet Documents

— AnyMedia® Access System, 82-Type Outdoor Electronics Cabinets (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, 52B and 52E Outdoor Electronics Cabinets (in PDF format)

— AnyMedia® Access System, 92-Type Indoor Electronics Cabinets Description, Installation, and Operations (to be supplied at a later date in PDF format)

• SLC® Documents

— SLC® Series 5 Carrier System J1C182BC-1 Remote Terminal Ring Shelf, User Manual (in PDF format)

xxii March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

363-211-128Related DocumentationTraditional DLC Interfaces

NOTE:An Adobe* Acrobat Reader is provided to view all PDF files.For documents in HTML format, users need and must supply their own Web browser to view them. The documentation has been verified using the following Web browsers: Netscape Navigator† 4.0 and Internet Explorer‡ 5.0 or later.

The AnyMedia Access System graphical system interface (GSI) is available on CD-ROMs or hard floppy disks.

Available in Print (hard copy) 0• AnyMedia Access System Documents

— 363-211-101, AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG)

— 363-211-106, AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations

— 363-211-127, AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—Integrated Access Terminal

— 363-211-128, AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal

— 363-211-125, AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide— 363-211-102, AnyMedia® Access System, Installation Manual— 363-211-129, AnyMedia® Access System, ConnectReach™ Terminal

User’s Guide — 363-211-130, AnyMedia® Access System, ConnectReach Plus™

Terminal User’s Guide — 363-211-300, AnyMedia® Access System, ADSL Element Manager

System Administrator’s Guide— 363-211-301, AnyMedia® Access System, ADSL Element Manager

System User’s Guide— 363-211-302, AnyMedia® Access System, AEM-BB Software Release

Description for Release 1.2— 363-211-401, AnyMedia® Access System, Element Manager for

Narrowband Services Release 1.0, Functional Description— 363-211-402, AnyMedia® Access System, Element Manager for

Narrowband Services Release 1.0, User Service Manual

* Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated† Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation‡ Internet Explorer is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xxiii

Related Documentation363-211-128


• Cabinet Documents

— 631-600-290, AnyMedia® Access System, 82-Type Outdoor Electronics Cabinets

— 631-600-293, AnyMedia® Access System, 52B and 52E Outdoor Electronics Cabinets

— 640-250-307, AnyMedia® Access System, 92-Type Indoor Electronics Cabinets Description, Installation, and Operations (orderable at a later date)

xxiv March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6

363-211-128How to Order This DocumentTraditional DLC Interfaces

How to Order This Document

Ordering number The ordering number for the AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal is 363-211-128.

Order procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and/or to request placement on the standing order list, send or call in an order as follows:

One-time orders One-time orders include the contents for the current document issue in effect at the time of order.

Standing orders You may request placement on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document. The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribution for all reissues of the document.

Local exchange carrier orders

Local exchange carrier customers should process documentation orders or standing order requests through their Company Documentation Coordinator.

Mail Order Telephone/Fax Order/Email Web Orders

Lucent TechnologiesAttention: Order Entry2855 N. Franklin Road

P.O. Box 19901USA-Indianapolis, IN

46219

Within USA:Phone:

1-888-LUCENT8(1-888-582-3688)FAX from USA:

+1-800-566-9568

Outside USA:Phone:

+1-317-322-6416FAX Outside USA:+1-317-322-6699

E-mail:[email protected]

Commercial customers:http://www.lucentdocs.com or

http://www.lucent8.com

Lucent Associates:http://www.cic.lucent.com

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 xxv

How to Comment on This Document363-211-128


How to Comment on This Document

Document comment procedure

To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to theComments Hotline ([email protected]).

Because customer satisfaction is extremely important to Lucent Technologies, every attempt is made to encourage feedback from customers about our information products.

xxvi March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


Introduction 1

Overview This document includes the applications and engineering planning information for the AnyMedia® Access System central office terminal (COT). This document describes in detail how the AnyMedia COT configurations are supported by the AnyMedia Access System. For information on the associated MDS2 shelf, which is used to implement digital loop carrier (DLC) special services, refer to the AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations.

Features and benefits

The AnyMedia COT, as part of a universal configuration, provides analog switch interfaces for the AnyMedia Access System. The AnyMedia COT enhances the feature set of the AnyMedia Access System by providing support for the following features:

• TR-NWT-008* mode 1 interface

• Integrated Network Access (INA) interface

• Traditional DLC services, including Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS), coin, and two-wire locally switched, nonlocally switched and nonswitched services

• Two- and four-wire special services (locally-switched, nonlocally and nonswitched) via an auxiliary MDS2 Shelf

• An Alarm Test Unit (ATU).

The benefits of the COT include the following:

• Compatibility with analog switch interfaces (both analog switches and analog interfaces on digital switches)

• Support for a full range of traditional telephony services

• COT-specific APs (e.g. FXO AP (LPA151) for using various vendor RTs)

* TR-NWT-000008, “Digital Interface Between the SLC-96 Digital Loop Carrier System and a Local Digital Switch,” Issue 2 (Telcordia Technologies, Inc., August, 1987) plus Revision 1, September 1993.

March 2007 1-1


• AnyMedia Universal Concentrator (UC) configuration hosting up to five RT shelves.

• Provides the ability to perform VF growth, unbundling and INA applications

• Facilitates CO and telemetry alarming

• Provides an interface for testing systems.

AnyMedia COT applications

The four main applications for the AnyMedia COT include:

1. In central offices (COs) that are equipped with analog switches or digital switches with analog interfaces, the AnyMedia COT terminates DS1 facilities from AnyMedia RTs and presents voice frequency (VF) interfaces toward the CO equipment. This is referred to as the universal DLC application.

2. The AnyMedia COT unbundles derived VF pairs from AnyMedia RTs for re-distribution to network service providers’ equipment.

3. The AnyMedia universal concentration (UC) adds the following features:

— Variable line/feeder-DS0 concentration ratio from about 1:1 to 20:1— One COT shelf can support up to five RT shelves— COT/RT combination with up to 512 lines total spread among APs in

ONU and RT shelves— COT and RT managed as separate entities.

4. In special situations, the AnyMedia COT provides an integrated network access (INA)-type virtual bank (VB) termination.

The universal DLC application

The universal DLC configuration refers to an AnyMedia RT and COT, interconnected by DS1 facilities, as illustrated in Figure 1-1 on page 1-3.

1-2 March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


Figure 1-1. Typical Universal AnyMedia Access System Application

The universal configuration provides the following:

• A metallic VF interface to the subscriber line at the RT

• A corresponding metallic VF interface at the CO. At the CO, the subscriber line circuit connects to any of the following:

— A local analog switch— Digital switch analog line units— Special services facilities.

Universal systems are implemented using TR-08 operation and can support from 1 to 4 DS1s per AnyMedia virtual RT (VRT). To support special services, an MDS2 shelf will normally be required at both the AnyMedia COT and its associated RT.

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 1-3


The unbundling application

The AnyMedia COT is frequently used to unbundle individual subscriber loops (VF pairs) for connection to network service providers (NSPs). A typical unbundling application is illustrated in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2. Typical AnyMedia COT Unbundling Application

In this application, the NSP typically has a co-location agreement, which provides for the installation of one or more DLC RTs in the central office of the existing local exchange carrier, as illustrated in Figure 1-2. Normally, these RTs are connected to the main distribution frame (MDF) in the CO, which connects the NSP’s facilities to the unbundled physical and derived loops from the AnyMedia COT (and optional MDS2).

The AnyMedia COT can interface up to 20 AnyMedia RTs, located in up to 8 different RT sites, as limited by the number of available test pairs. The derived VF pairs can be cross-connected to the NSP’s system at the MDF. This enables the unbundled VF pairs (both POTS and specials) to be redistributed to one or more of the co-located NSP interfaces. Figure 1-2 illustrates an unbundling application with up to 20 RTs, in which the derived VF pairs at the CO are terminated on the NSP’s RTs and /or the local switch.

Test pairs The example in Figure 1-2 illustrates the use of metallic test pairs to implement the test pairs to the RT sites. Tollgrade units in an associated MDS2 shelf can also be used to implement “digital bypass pairs” for test purposes. Alternatively, digital



bypass pairs can be provided using a different DLC system, particularly for growth sites at which a DLC system is already in place.

Figure 1-2 also shows integrated interfaces from the local digital switch (LDS) to the RT sites for customer loops that do not require unbundling.

The AnyMedia COT universal communication channel (UCC) is implemented by connecting a remote operations channel (ROC) at the AnyMedia RT end and a corresponding ROC channel at the AnyMedia COT end of an AnyMedia system in the universal configuration. The UCC provides an aggregated operations interface to multiple AnyMedia systems at subtending RT sites. Each interface consists of a single DS0 channel, which provides an effective means for administering multiple AnyMedia RTs via a single operation system (OS) Ethernet port on the AnyMedia COT. Refer to OAM&P Interfaces on page 4-8 for additional information on the UCC.

INA applications The AnyMedia COT can be configured to provide an integrated network access (INA) virtual bank (VB) interface. Use of this configuration should be limited to special situations where the unique features of a PUB 43801 channel bank configuration are required. For most applications, using a TR-08 interface to AnyMedia RT sites provides the advantage of remote alarm reporting and should be the preferred arrangement. However, when the AnyMedia COT terminates a remote D-bank or PUB 43801 bank, such as the Tollgrade Micro-Bank, the INA mode should be used. An example of a possible INA VB application is described in the topic titled TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) channel and RT drop testing on page 6-58.

AnyMedia universal concentrator (UC) configuration

The AnyMedia COT equipped with FXO APs (LPA151) and provisioned in an UC VCOT-to-VRT configuration is frequently used to unbundle individual subscriber lines (VF pairs) for connection to network service providers (NSPs), see Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.

The maximum number of virtual central office terminals supported in an AnyMedia COT shelf are:

• 5 UC VCOTs

• 20 GR-008 VCOTs

• 20 INA VBs

Any combination of these virtual central office terminals above is allowed within the range of 1 to 20 DS1 feeders between COT and RT and up to 512 loops per COT shelf. One AnyMedia COT supports up to five UC VRTs (virtual remote terminals). All UC VRTs are always available and can be brought into service simultaneously.



The testing possibilities (e.g. PGTC, metallic testing) in a AnyMedia UC configuration are identical to an AnyMedia COT unbundling application, see Test pairs on page 1-4.

The AnyMedia COT is located in the same building as the local switch or the carrier systems (e.g. one or more DLC RTs). Therefore, the FXO AP (LPA151) complies with the intra-building specification in GR-1089-CORE.

Figure 1-3. AnyMedia COT in Universal Concentrator (UC) Configuration

Principal COT features

DS1 interfaces 1• Up to 20 DS1 facilities

• TR-08 mode 1: up to five 96-line or twenty 24-line TR-08 virtual COTs (VCOTs)

• PUB 43801 INA banks (one for each DS1)

• UC VCOT: 1-20 (maximum number of DS1s for all 5 UC VCOTs per shelf is also 20) and up to 512 lines (plus one ROC).

Service node interfaces 1• Support for both voice and narrowband data

• Large capacity, high density application packs (APs) for high runner services

21610_fig_186f

Central Office

LocalSwitch

ATU

NSPDLC RT

NSPDLC RT

AnyMediaCOT

to NSPs CO

UnbundledLoops

(1 - 512)

to NSPs CO

MDF

PGTC

AnyMedia#1RT

Up to 5RTs

at up to5 RT Sites

AnyMedia

IntegratedGR-008 or

GR-303

UC VRT(1-20 DS1sper UC VRT)

UC VRT(1-20 DS1sper UC VRT)

Up to 8Test Pairsto RT Sites

AnyMedia#5RT

LPA151

LPA151



• SLC Series 5 and SLC®-2000 channel units in an associated MDS2 shelf for a wide variety of special services.

Services supported 1• COT FAST shelf

— POTS— Some two-wire specials— Coin

Note: The Universal Concentrator (UC) capability is solely supported by the LPA151 current sink (CS) AP at the AnyMedia COT. The LPA151 is modified in the FW from the LPA150 in order to support VFOFFHK messages to the COMDAC when the AP detects ringing for terminating calls. For this reason, only the following services are supported in a UC VCOT/VRT system:

— Loop-start (LS) POTS— Ground-start (GS) POTS/SPOTS— Coin— 2-wire foreign exchange office/station end (FXO/FXS) D4 signaling (

not supported by UC)

Special services cannot be provisioned in a UC VCOT/VRT system. The special service lines are supported via INA VBs and GR-008 VCOTs, which can be provisioned in the same Fast Shelf as the UC VCOT/VRT.

• MDS2 shelf

— two- and four-wire nonswitched and nonlocally switched special services— Digital Data Services (DDS)— ISDN — P-phone.

COT FAST shelf capacity 1

A rated capacity of 480 voice or voice-grade services (including up to 64 kbps DDS) is supported by a combination of the COT FAST and MDS2 shelves via INA VBs and GR-008 VCOTs.

When the RT and COT FAST shelves use a UC VCOT/VRT interface, the number of lines that the COT shelf can provide is limited to 512 lines (VF pairs), derived from 16 slots with 32 LPA151 lines apiece (16 x 32) at the COT shelf. 20 DS1s can be divided among the up to five UC virtual central office terminals ( UC VCOTs), INA VBs, and GR-008 VCOTs in the shelf. Each DS1 carries 24 DS0s.

The AnyMedia COT sytem additionally equipped with an MDS2 shelf (2x48) plus 14 APs (14x32) can support a maximum of 544 lines.



Plant deployment flexibility 1• Can be installed in all standard 26-inch wide COT bay sizes

• Uses an ATU to provide an office alarm interface and access to a PGTC for channel and loop testing.

NOTE:In an AnyMedia COT configuration, PGTC testing can be performed for a particular COT FAST shelf only if that shelf has an associated ATU.



Physical characteristics

The following table describes the permissible AnyMedia COT shelf configurations for a single-shelf COT and for a COT with an MDS2 shelf. Figure 1-4 on page 1-10 illustrates a COT FAST shelf and its associated (optional) ATU and (optional) MDS2 shelf.

Notes:

1. One MDS2 shelf may be associated with each COT FAST shelf.

2. The number of IODS1 packs required is dependent on the DS1 feeder configuration and whether or not I/O pack protection is selected. The shelf can support 5 IODS1s (20 DS1 interfaces) plus one protection pack.

3. The COMDAC pack can operate in simplex or duplex 1:1 protected mode.

4. The maximum number of DS0-rate services provided by a COT FAST shelf is a function of the number of active IODS1 packs (5 IODS1, maximum; 4 DS1s per each IODS1) and customer configured lines/DS1 concentration ratio.

5. Each MDSU connects to an MSC in the MDS2 shelf and serves 12 channel unit (CU) slots. If two MDSUs are used to serve 24 channel CUs, the MDSUs must be installed in adjacent slots. Each MDS2 shelf can have up to two MSCs. The MDS2 shelf at the AnyMedia COT can be equipped with a variety of different codes of SLC-2000 and SLC Series 5 compatible CUs. For more information on the MDS2, see AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations (order number 363-211-106).

6. The ATU is required to provide access to the metallic or digital test pair(s) and to interface with the PGTC to support channel and RT drop testing.

7. The ATU also provides the CO alarm and alarm telemetry interfaces for the system.



Figure 1-4. COT FAST Shelf with Optional ATU and MDS2 Shelf



AnyMedia COT applications and services

The services supported by the AnyMedia COT include locally and nonlocally switched services, nonswitched services, and digital data services. For a complete list of the services in an AnyMedia RT or COT configuration, see Table 3-8 on page 3-21.

Switched services 1

The AnyMedia COT supports interfaces for locally switched and nonlocally switched services as follows:

• PRCOIN, PRCOINCS, and PROG2W APs on the COT FAST shelf

• Several SLC-2000 or SLC Series 5 compatible channel units (CUs) on the MDS2 shelf (see Table 3-8 on page 3-21).

COT FAST shelf switched service descriptions

All of the following services are supported by APs:

• Single party message telephone service, which includes CLASS* features

• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start UVG services)

• Loop-start service with line-side answer supervision

• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start) service with line-side answer supervision

• Dial-tone-first coin service

• FXO/FXS (D4) signaling (only supported by COIN_FXO_UC (LPA151)

• DID PBX-CO trunks (DPO interface).

MDS2 shelf switched service descriptions 1

The AnyMedia COT supports interfaces for locally switched and nonlocally switched services that are supported on the MDS2 shelf as follows:

• DID PBX-CO trunks (DPT interface)

• Four-wire FX lines and trunks (FXS/FXO/TDM interfaces)

• Enhanced business service (EBS) (P-Phone)

• Nonlocally switched service (ISDN BRITE).

Nonswitched services 1

Nonswitched services are supported by the PRCOIN, PRCOINCS and PROG2W APs on the COT FAST shelf and by several SLC-2000 and SLC Series 5 compatible CUs on the MDS2 shelf.

* CLASS is a service mark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.



The AnyMedia COT supports interfaces for nonswitched services on the COT FAST shelf via the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs as follows:

• Voiceband private lines, TO interface.

The AnyMedia COT supports interfaces for nonswitched services on the MDS2 shelf as follows:

• PBX off-premises stations

• PBX tie trunks

• Four-wire private line digital data

• Voice private line

• DC/AC alarms

• Digital test pairs: for remote metallic testing of loop carrier drops

• Two-wire private-line manual ring service

• Two-wire PLAR service.

Digital data services (DDS) for MDS2

The AnyMedia COT supports interfaces for DDS service on the MDS2 shelf as follows:

• OCU interface

• DS0 interface.

The digital services include the following:

• Selectable customer data rates of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 56, or 64 kbps, including switched 56 kbps (SW56) service option compatible with major carriers

• Error correction (majority vote, 19.2 single time slot, or second channel error correction)

• Zero code suppression

• Secondary channel (a low-speed telemetry channel added to the customer data bits).



COT Configurations 2

Overview 2

The applications and services of the AnyMedia Access System are supported by several COT configurations. This section details the configuration options for traditional digital loop carrier (DLC) services.

Page

COT Configuration Options 2-2Central Office Bay Arrangements 2-32-3

2-2

March 2007 2-1


COT Configuration Options363-211-128


2Issue 6COT Configuration Options 2

Overview AnyMedia COT bay arrangements are to be locally engineered and may include multiple FAST shelves, ATU shelves, and the optional MDS2 shelf.

363-211-128Central Office Bay ArrangementsTraditional DLC Interfaces

2Central Office Bay Arrangements 2

Overview Normally, the AnyMedia COT will be mounted in a flush mount bay with front and rear access, which is typical for a CO environment.

This section describes the following:

• Recommended configurations*

• COT flush mount arrangements

• Associated equipment

• Optional special services and transport.

For the CO environment, the AnyMedia COT can be mounted in a 7-foot, 9-foot, or 11-foot 6-inch CO bay. These bays are 26 inches wide with 23-inch spacing between mounting centers.

NOTE:All equipment described in this section is specified in Appendix A, Floor Plan Data Sheets.

Recommended configurations

Typical 7-foot AnyMedia COT bay arrangement 2

A typical AnyMedia COT 7-foot bay arrangement (illustrated in Figure 2-1) may be equipped with up to three COT FAST shelves, three ATUs, one (optional) MDS2 shelf and forced convection cooling equipment (fans).

* The bays discussed in this section are recommended, locally configured assemblies, and are not factory wired bays.


Central Office Bay Arrangements363-211-128


Figure 2-1. Typical 7-Foot AnyMedia COT Bay Arrangement

A typical flush mounted COT 7-foot bay arrangement consists of the following:

• Three AnyMedia FAST shelves per bay (The bay has a total capacity of 1440 POTS lines; 480 per COT FAST shelf. POTS, two-wire, and coin services can be mixed on a shelf.)

• One MDS2 shelf and its associated baffle

• Thee ATUs (one for each FAST shelf)

• One fan for each COT FAST shelf for forced convection cooling.

NOTE:The MDS2 shelf is optional; however, providing space in the bay lineup for an MDS2 shelf and its associated baffle facilitates its later installation. If the MDS2 is deployed, the bay capacity remains at 1440 lines.



Alternate 7-foot bay arrangement with two COT FAST shelves and two MDS2 shelves 2

Another possible 7-foot bay arrangement (shown in Figure 2-2) includes

• Two COT FAST shelves with associated fans

• Two ATUs

• One MDS2 shelf with its associated baffle for each COT FAST shelf.

Figure 2-2. Alternative AnyMedia COT 7-Foot Bay Arrangement

Other bay arrangements 2

Other AnyMedia COT bay arrangements can be used, but are not discussed in this document.




AnyMedia COT FAST shelf mounting

The AnyMedia COT shelf is available in two versions: the AB shelf and the AC shelf (see Powering options on page 6-53). Normally, the COT FAST shelf will be mounted in a rear (flush) mount CO bay, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-6.

Figure 2-3. Rear Mount COT Bay Arrangement

Figure 2-3 illustrates that a rear mounted shelf uses a bracket attached to the rear of the bay, causing the shelf to protrude from the front of the bay by approximately 1 inch.

AnyMedia COT cabling requirements

Cables required for AnyMedia COT applications includes the following:

• VF cables

• DS1 cables

• Power cables

• Operations connection cables

• Test access cables

• Ringing cables

• CO output alarm cables

• ATU cables.

See AnyMedia® Access System Installation Manual, for detailed cabling information.



VF cables 2

Each VF cable supports 32 tip/ring pairs per AP, 1 cable per AP, 16 cables per shelf, installed for AnyMedia Access System FAST shelves during installation. The other end of each cable is terminated at an MDF or at a local cross connect, depending on the application.

When the bay is equipped with an MDS2 shelf, it must be cabled separately to the MDF or local cross connect.

The VF cables associated with the AP slot(s) occupied by the MDSU circuit pack(s) in the FAST shelf serving the MDS2 shelf will be disconnected from the shelf and placed in the adjacent cable duct.

DS1 cables (facility) 2

Each AnyMedia Access System FAST shelf can terminate 20 DS1 facilities from the transport facility on five IODS1 packs. Separate transmit and receive pairs are required for the connection to the transport facility. These cables usually terminate at a DSX-1 panel.

A sixth pack provides 1:5 protection of the five in-service IODS1 packs. The protection IODS1 pack has no DS1 cabling connections.

Power cables 2

Cables are provided for two –48V inputs and returns to the FAST shelf. The ATU and MDS2 shelves are powered directly by the associated FAST shelf.

Operations system connection cables 2

A FAST shelf backplane connector is available to connect the AnyMedia COT to a remote operations system. This is a D-sub type connector to which a shielded cable must be attached for a permanent connection to a 10BaseT Ethernet hub. The jumper from the backplane connector to the front panel RJ-45 connector must be removed when a permanent backplane connection is made.

Test access cables (test access and control) 2

The ATU provides the cable interface for up to eight test pairs, which may be connected to up to eight AnyMedia RT sites via the MDF in the CO. The test connections from the CO to the RT site may be implemented using either:

• Actual outside plant (OSP) cable pairs

• Digital bypass pairs that are created using the appropriate Tollgrade units in an MDS2 shelf or Micro-Bank.

A typical implementation using digital bypass pairs is described in COT Testing in Chapter 6, System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services.




The ATU also provides:

• The cabling interface to the PGTC for implementing channel and RT drop testing using the test pairs

• Cabling for daisy-chaining of this interface to multiple systems within a bay.

Ringing cables 2

Cables are required to provide a –20 Hz ringing connection and return to the FAST shelf from the office ringing supply. Ringing supplies for the MDS2 shelf are provided through a cable from the associated FAST shelf.

ATU cables 2

The ATU requires the following additional cables:

• Power—connects the DC power cable from the FAST shelf fuse circuit module (FCM) to the ATU shelf power dangler cable

• Bypass interface cable—connects to the bypass pair termination at the MDF

• Parallel telemetry—connects the parallel telemetry cable to the ATU shelf

• Office alarms (audible and visual)—cabling runs from the ATU shelf to the terminal strip at the top of the bay

• Cable between ATU and FAST shelf.

COT output alarm cables 2

In addition to the ATU alarm signal outputs, such outputs can also be obtained from the CTU via the J110 connector on the FAST shelf backplane.

Associated equipment

Generally, the following equipment must be connected to the system to support its operation. There may be alternatives to the identified equipment, and specifically recommended equipment is identified as known or needed. In COs, this equipment may be shared over many AnyMedia Access Systems or among many different other equipment types not related to the AnyMedia Access System access application. These components can be installed in the AnyMedia Access System bays or may be placed in adjacent bays or remote locations in the office or building.

• Power plant or power consumption needs—The amount and type of power needed for the system bay and for associated equipment are specified in:

— Chapter 6, System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services, section titled COT FAST Shelf Powering

— Appendix A, Floor Plan Data Sheets.

• This power plant could be unique to the application of the AnyMedia Access System or shared with other office equipment.



• Ringing plant or ringing power needs—In some cases (e.g., when a PLAR CU is used on the MDS2), a ringing supply is required. The ringing plant and power needs are specified in COT FAST Shelf Powering in Chapter 6, System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services. The shelf requires only a negative superimposed ringing source and must have the–20Hz RTN connected to frame ground at the ringing source.

• Transport equipment and facilities—The COT FAST shelf DS1 transport interface is based on the T1.102 standard, so that a variety of products can be used to implement the required DS1 interconnect facilities, including:

• A fiber multiplexer, such as in the DDM-2000 product family• T1 carrier via office repeater bays• Other DS1 level transport equipment.

• DSX-1 cross-connect—A COT FAST shelf connects to transport equipment at a DS1 level. Therefore, a DSX-1 cross connect panel may be placed at a location within equalization range of both the transport system and the COT FAST shelf. This distance is wire-gauge dependent, typically no more that 655 feet from each terminal for 22-gauge wire.

• VF test equipment— A PGTC is normally used to support locally switched service testing. A metallic or digital bypass pair connected between the AnyMedia COT and RT is required to support loop tests. Alternatively, a remote test unit (RTU) can be installed at the RT for this purpose. A discussion of circuit testing is provided in Chapter 6, System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services, section titled COT Testing.

• ATU—An ATU reports alarms and trouble indications using telemetry and audible and visual closures. The ATU provides office alarm closures for audible and visual alarms, parallel telemetry outputs for the AnyMedia COT, interface to the PGTC for channel and RT drop testing, and metallic or digital bypass pair connections.*

• Ringing filter unit—When an AnyMedia COT bay is equipped for ringing, a ringing filter is required. The AnyMedia COT can provide ringing for any CU that may require it. For example, ringing is required by the AnyMedia COT when the AUA75 PLAR CU or the AUA45B ringing repeater CU is used in conjunction with the COT MDS2 shelf.

Optional special services and transport

The MDS2 shelf can support up to 96 special services using SLC Series 5 and SLC-2000 compatible CUs.

There is a high probability of encountering at least one special service circuit in a universal configuration of the AnyMedia Access System. Accordingly, many service providers will install at least one MDS2 shelf at each end of the system. It

* In a COT configuration, PGTC testing can be performed for a particular FAST shelf only if that shelf also has an associated ATU.




is recommended that an MDS2 shelf be installed with each new AnyMedia Access System application. However, since some service providers may choose to defer the cost of the MDS2 shelf, it is possible to install the MDS2 shelf in a bay with an in-service AnyMedia FAST shelf without service impact. It is also possible to install the MDS2 shelf in an adjacent bay to the host shelf. The maximum 15-foot cable distance between the FAST shelf and the MDS2 shelf limits the available positions in the second bay.

Only one MDS2 shelf will be supported by a COT FAST shelf. Every line on each MDS2 shelf at both the AnyMedia COT and the RT must be electronically cross-connected to a TR-08 VCOT or INA bank.



Product Description 3

Overview 3

This section provides detailed descriptions of the AnyMedia COT FAST shelf and traditional digital loop carrier (DLC) service circuit packs. Each component is described in terms of its features and functionality, its physical features, such as size and faceplate characteristics, and its specifications.

Page

COT FAST Shelf Description 3-2AnyMedia COT Description 3-7Choosing AnyMedia COT Shelf Equipment Options 3-9Circuit Packs Used in the AnyMedia COT FAST Shelf 3-10Alarm Test Unit 3-11Application Pack— PRCOINCS LPA150 3-13Application Pack— COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 3-16Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System 3-213-21

3-163-133-113-103-93-73-2

March 2007 3-1

COT FAST Shelf Description363-211-128


310COT FAST Shelf Description 3

Overview The COT FAST shelf is the main shelf in the AnyMedia Access System. The AnyMedia COT supports up to 6 IODS1s, up to 2 COMDACs, 1 CTU, and 16 slots for telephony APs. There are a number of possible COT FAST shelf choices that support the applications described in Chapter 2. The COT equipment description includes the following components:

• FAST shelf

• ATU

• Optional MDS2 shelf

• Application pack plug-ins

COT FAST shelf features and functions

The AnyMedia Access System COT FAST shelf shown in Figure 3-1 consists of a sheet metal mechanical structure that does the following:

• Supports and aligns circuit packs

• Locates and mounts a multilayer backplane

• Enables mounting into supporting structures

• Provides a mating interface between circuit packs, backplane inputs and outputs, and intershelf connections.

Front doors, backplane cover, and metal screens on both the top and bottom provide the EMC shielding. Figure 3-1 shows the front view of the COT FAST shelf without doors. AP slots 14 and 15 (the default slots) are populated with MDSUs to support an MDS2 shelf.

There are two versions of the AnyMedia Access System FAST shelf available for COT applications:.

• Equipped with the J1C282AB-1, L1 COT FAST shelf with duplicated power (see FCM on page 3-5)

— Front and rear access (adaptable to flush mount)— ED7C836-30, G1 replaceable fuse circuit module (FCM)

• Equipped with the J1C282AC-1, L1 COT FAST shelf with direct power (see FCM on page 3-5)

— Front and rear access (adaptable to flush mount)— ED7C836-30, G2 replaceable FCM.


363-211-128COT FAST Shelf DescriptionTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 3-1. AnyMedia Access System COT FAST Shelf (Doors Not Shown)

The AnyMedia COT FAST shelf requires forced air cooling using a fan shelf which mounts directly above the FAST shelf. Each fan shelf is equipped with six fan units (6A fan shelf) or two blowers (6B fan shelf). Dimensions for the fan shelf are shown in Table 3-1.

The fan failure and FCM bus failure alarms of a particular shelf can be cabled and remoted three ways:

1. Cabled to a miscellaneous pair panel or MDF and cross-connected to a cable providing miscellaneous alarm reporting for one or more shelves.

2. Cabled directly to the miscellaneous alarm inputs of the COT FAST shelf with no other miscellaneous alarm input capability provided.

to




3. Cabled directly to the miscellaneous alarm inputs of the COT FAST shelf with miscellaneous alarm input capability provided via cabling to an MDF or miscellaneous pair panel.

Table 3-1. Fan or Baffle Shelf Dimensions

Physical dimensions The assembled COT FAST shelf dimensions are shown in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2. COT FAST Shelf Dimensions

Shelf mounting arrangement

The COT FAST shelf shown in Figure 3-2 is arranged to accommodate 6 small and 19 large circuit packs, all on 25 mm horizontal spacing. From left to right, the shelf contains the following:

• 6 IODS1 FAC100 packs

• 2 COMDAC packs

• 1 CTU

• 16 slots for APs or MDSU server cards.

In the rear (flush) mount arrangement (See AnyMedia COT FAST shelf mounting on page 2-6), a cable trough is located at the bottom front of the shelf. The VF cables plug into the faceplate connectors of the APs. The VF cables are routed vertically down into the cable trough, then to each side and under the shelf for routing in the bay cable ducts in the rear. Half of the cables exit the left side of the shelf, and half exit the right side.

Height Width Depth

inch centi-meter inch centi-

meter inch centi-meter

3.8 9.7 21.4 54.9 12.5 31.8

COT FAST ShelfHeight Width Depth



With Cables 17.0 43.5 21.4 54.9 13 33.3Without Cables 17.0 43.5 21.4 54.9 11 28.2


363-211-128COT FAST Shelf DescriptionTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 3-2. COT FAST Shelf Arrangement

FCM The fuse circuit module (FCM) assembly supports system powering and alarms for the COT FAST shelf. The FCM is installed at the top of the COT FAST shelf and is considered part of the shelf. The FCM provides power interfaces for two independent –48V A and B feeders and –20 Hz ringing voltage.

Either a duplicated or direct power version of the FCM is selected using a FAST shelf ordering code (options and codes are described below). The FCM assembly can be replaced in the field without replacing the shelf. Use the ordering code to specify which replacement FCM is required.

Depending upon the application, either of the following types of FCMs can be ordered:

• Shelf type J1C282AB-1, L1, equipped with a duplicated power FCM. This FCM type (ED7C836-30, G1) is replaceable without replacing or removing the shelf. It provides duplicated power, which means that if one of the inputs fail, both the F1 and F2 fuses and power distribution buses will continue to supply power to the whole COT FAST shelf. As long as one–48V input is present, all shelf slots will remain powered.




• Shelf type J1C282AC-1, L1, equipped with a direct power FCM. This FCM (ED7C836-30, G2) is replaceable without replacing or removing the shelf. The direct power arrangement splits the load between feeders. If one input or a fuse fails, half the subscribers will lose service. Common packs, however, will remain operational due to the redundancy of the power distribution buses.

The COT FCM features include the following:

• Dual power input from the office supply and distribution to the COT FAST shelf, MDS2 shelf and ATU

• Ringing power input and distribution

• Fusing for COT FAST shelf power, MDS2 shelf power, and ringing

• Test jacks for A and B input power, COT FAST shelf power, and ringing power

• Green LED, which indicates that either the A or B feeder power is present

• LAN connection jack

• Red system summary ALM light is visible when the COT FAST shelf doors are closed

• Red A and B input power fail LEDs

• Circuitry to provide external alarms for notification of input power fuse failure. These can be connected to the system’s miscellaneous alarm ports for reporting input power failure to a remote operations center.

• Duplicated power protection circuitry, available with J1C282AB-1, L1, COT FAST shelves, only

Circuit pack dimensions

The dimensions of the circuit packs are shown in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3. Circuit Pack and AP Dimensions

Functional block diagram

Table 3-3 provides a COT FAST shelf functional block diagram. This figure shows the relationships of the circuit packs and APs described in the rest of this chapter.

Circuit PackHeight Width Depth



IODS1 3.8 9.7 1.0 2.5 7.7 19.6All Other Circuit Packs and APs 13 33.0 1.0 2.5 7.7 19.6


363-211-128AnyMedia COT DescriptionTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 3-3. COT FAST Shelf Functional Block Diagram

AnyMedia COT Description 3

Overview The principal AnyMedia COT components include the:

• COT FAST Shelf

• ATU

• MDS2 shelf


AnyMedia COT Description363-211-128


• Unique application pack plug-ins.

COT FAST shelf The COT FAST shelf is the main shelf in the AnyMedia Access System COT. It consists of a sheet metal structure that supports and aligns circuit packs and the backplane and provides a mating interface between circuit packs, backplane inputs and outputs, and intershelf connections.

ATU The ATU (equipment code 1A ATU) is used for the following:

• To support PGTC channel and RT drop testing

• To send environmental alarms over a remote telemetry system

• To support central office visual and audible alarm interfaces.

The 1A ATU shelf obtains power from its associated FAST shelf (either type J1C282AB-1 or J1C282AC-1) via a cable from the FCM. This cable can also provide power for an MDS2 shelf.

MDS2 shelf A variety of special services can be supported by installing SLC-2000 and SLC Series 5 compatible CUs in the AnyMedia COT MDS2 shelf. The MDS2 shelf-related common units, including the MDSU, MSC, or PTU are identical to the units used in the RT MDS2. Current sink (CS) CUs are normally used for analog switch interfaces. Current feed (CF) CUs may be used at the AnyMedia COT for certain applications.

Unique application pack plug-ins

The PRCOINCS CS AP provides 32 line interfaces for the AnyMedia COT. These lines usually connect directly to the analog interfaces of a local switch to provide POTS, SPOTS or coin services.



363-211-128 Choosing AnyMedia COT Shelf EquipmentOptionsTraditional DLC Interfaces

3Choosing AnyMedia COT Shelf Equipment Options 3

AnyMedia COT options

The two AnyMedia COT powering options, duplicated and direct, are described in the topic titled FCM on page 3-5. This section summarizes the application choices that must be made to select the correct equipment. More details on the final codes required are contained in the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide.

Table 3-4 identifies the available COT FAST and MDS2 shelves. Every COT combination needs a FAST shelf. The COT FAST options include power and mounting features that suit a variety of customer needs. The FAST shelf can be coupled with an MDS2 shelf to increase the available options.

See Chapter 2, COT Configurations for detailed descriptions of the two basic applications. Refer to the AnyMedia Access Shelf Ordering Guide for cabling and other hardware requirements.

For information on the different powering options, see COT FAST Shelf Powering on page 6-53.

Table 3-4. Available COT FAST Shelf and Additional Services Options

COT FAST Shelf MDS2 Shelf

Mounting Option Power Option Ordering Number Ordering Number

COT bay flush mounting duplicated J1C282AB-1, L1

J1C286AA-1, L3COT bay flush mounting direct J1C282AC-1, L1

Circuit Packs Used in the AnyMedia COT FAST Shelf363-211-128


33Circuit Packs Used in the AnyMedia COT FAST Shelf 3

Overview The function codes for the packs used on the COT FAST shelf are listed below. For optional application packs, see Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System on page 3-21.

Each function code has an associated apparatus code. The complete list of apparatus codes supported at the AnyMedia RT and COT FAST shelves are listed in the AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide. Consult the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide for the correct apparatus code when ordering a pack.

Function Code Apparatus Code Description in Document

IODS1 FAC100 AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

COMDAC COM101a

a. The COM102, currently available for the AnyMedia RT, is not supportedby the AnyMedia COT.

AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

COMDAC COM103 AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

CTU DTP101, DTP102, DTP104

AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

PRCOINCS LPA150AnyMedia® Access System Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal

COIN_FXO_UC LPA151AnyMedia® Access System Feature Supplement—Central Office Terminal

PRCOIN LPA350 AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

PROG2W LPA380 AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254

MDSU MSC100 AnyMedia® Access System Data Sheet Book, 363-211-254


363-211-128Alarm Test UnitTraditional DLC Interfaces

Alarm Test Unit 3

Overview The ATU shelf provides the COT interface to both the PGTC and the bypass pairs used for channel and RT drop testing. It also provides:

• Alarm closures for central office audible and visual alarms

• Parallel telemetry outputs for a universal system.

The ATU is usually mounted in the same frame as the COT FAST shelf, though, it can also be mounted in an adjacent bay.

COT/ATU communications

The COT FAST shelf communicates with the ATU via an EIA232E/547 asynchronous, 9.6 kbps serial link. Through this link, the COT receives and sends signals from and to the PGTC to set up test sessions with external loop test systems (such as Tollgrade’s LoopCare™ system) to support channel and RT drop testing. The COT can also send signals to the ATU to control the output alarm closures (audible and visual alarms and parallel telemetry).

Test function For the test function, the ATU supports eight bypass pair connections and up to four simultaneous PGTC test sessions. When the COT FAST shelf is connected to RTs located at different physical sites, each site must have its own bypass pair.

Alarm function For the alarm function, the ATU alarms connect to the central office audible and visual alarms, including critical, major, minor, and power minor (power minor audible is not supported). The ATU provides parallel telemetry alarm output closures for connection to a remote alarm system.

Figure 3-4 on page 3-12 illustrates the ATU front view, and Table 3-5 on page 3-12 shows the functions and colors of the LED indicators.


Alarm Test Unit363-211-128


Figure 3-4. Alarm Test Unit (ATU)

Table 3-5. ATU LED Indicators

LED Function Color

FAULT The ATU has failed. Red

CRITICAL The COT is reporting a near-end or far-end critical alarm. Red

BUSY A channel test is in progress. Green

MAJOR The COT is reporting a near-end or far-end major alarm. Red

PWR MINOR

The COT is reporting a far-end power minor/miscellaneous alarm. Yellow

MINOR The COT is reporting a near-end or far-end minor alarm. Yellow


363-211-128Application Pack— PRCOINCS LPA150Traditional DLC Interfaces

3

Application Pack—PRCOINCS LPA150 3

Overview The PRCOINCS current sink (CS) AP provides 32 line interfaces for the AnyMedia Access System COT. These lines usually connect directly to the analog interfaces of a local switch for providing POTS, SPOTS or coin services.

The PRCOINCS AP line interfaces are segregated into two groups of 16 lines:

• Lines 1 through 16 can each provide dial-tone-first coin service, single-party message telephone (POTS) service, or 2-wire loop-start/ground-start locally switched SPOTS special services.

• Lines 17 through 32 of the PRCOINCS AP can each provide single-party message telephone (POTS) service, or 2-wire loop-start/ground-start locally switched SPOTS special services.

A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 3-5 on page 3-14, the faceplate is shown in Figure 3-6 on page 3-15, and Table 3-6 on page 3-16 lists the functions and colors for LED indicators.

The line interfaces of the PRCOINCS AP are not designed to withstand outside plant surge voltages or commercial power contact. The lines of the PRCOINCS AP must not be directly connected or bridged to outside plant cable pairs.

The circuits of the PRCOINCS AP are testable by the PGTC. All lines provide on-hook impedance signatures that are compatible with the requirements of TR-TSY-000465. Lines that are provisioned for coin service provide a distinctive signature that can be differentiated from POTS and locally switched special services circuits.

The PRCOINCS AP supports bridging access to each tip/ring pair via the test jacks on the CTU faceplate for local test access.


Application Pack— PRCOINCS LPA150363-211-128



Figure 3-5. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Functional Block Diagram

Features and functions

The PRCOINCS LPA150 AP may be provisioned to provide the following features and functions:

Standard POTS service 3• Single party message telephone service

• Supports all CLASS features

• Supports TR-08 signaling

• Supports bridging test access, but not splitting test access.

Locally switched, two-wire services 3• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start) UVG services

• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start) service with line-side answer supervision.

Locally switched, coin services 3

Lines 1 through 16 of the PRCOINCS LPA150 AP may also be provisioned to provide dial-tone-first coin service.


363-211-128Application Pack— PRCOINCS LPA150Traditional DLC Interfaces

Equipment description

Application pack faceplate 3

Figure 3-6. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Faceplate


Application Pack— COIN_FXO_UC LPA151363-211-128


Application pack LED indicators 3

Application Pack—COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 3

Overview The COIN_FXO_UC AP provides 32 line interfaces for the AnyMedia Access System COT. These lines usually connect directly to the analog interfaces of a local switch for providing POTS, SPOTS, coin, or non-locally switched services connected to a D4 or equivalent. Compared to PRCOINCS LPA150, the COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 can be used in UC applications for a UC VCOT and adds FXO/FXS (D4) signaling.

The COIN_FXO_UC AP line interfaces are segregated into two groups of 16 lines:

• Lines 1 through 16 can each provide dial-tone-first coin service, single-party message telephone (POTS) service, 2-wire loop-start/ground-start locally switched SPOTS special services, or non-locally switched services (NLS).

• Lines 17 through 32 of the COIN_FXO_UC AP can each provide single-party message telephone (POTS) service, 2-wire loop-start/ground-start locally switched SPOTS special services, or non-locally switched services (NLS) to D4 INA VBs.Note: Non-locally switched lines are not connected to a local switch.

A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-17, the faceplate is shown in Figure 3-8 on page 3-19, and Table 3-7 on page 3-20 lists the functions and colors for LED indicators.

The line interfaces of the COIN_FXO_UC AP are not designed to withstand outside plant surge voltages or commercial power contact. The lines of the COIN_FXO_UC AP must not be directly connected or bridged to outside plant cable pairs.

The circuits of the COIN_FXO_UC AP are testable by the PGTC. All lines provide on-hook impedance signatures that are compatible with the requirements of TR-TSY-000465. Lines that are provisioned for coin service provide a distinctive signature that can be differentiated from POTS and locally switched special services circuits.

Table 3-6. PRCOINCS LPA150 AP Faceplate LEDs

LED Function Color

FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the AP.Flashes during self-tests. Red

BUSY Indicates at least one line is off-hook. Green


363-211-128Application Pack— COIN_FXO_UC LPA151Traditional DLC Interfaces

The COIN_FXO_UC AP supports bridging access to each tip/ring pair via the test jacks on the CTU faceplate for local test access. Splitting test access is not supported.


Figure 3-7. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Functional Block Diagram

Features and functions

The COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP may be provisioned to provide the following features and functions:

Standard POTS service 3• Single party message telephone service

• Supports all CLASS features

• Supports TR-08 signaling

• Supports bridging test access, but not splitting test access.

Locally switched, two-wire services 3• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start) UVG services

• SPOTS (loop-start and ground-start) service with line-side answer supervision.

21610_fig_006ee

BackplaneSide

FaceplateSide

16Tip/Ring Pairs:POTS, SPOTS, NLS

16Tip/Ring Pairs:COIN, POTS,SPOTS, NLS

COMDAC(Duplex Mode)-TransmissionBandwidth

- Control andCommunications

- System Timing

CTU- Test Access- External OS andCommunicationInterfaces

Fuse Module- 48V Power,

Ground, andRinging

Analog LineInterface

andSignalingFunctions

Control

COIN_FXO_UC Application Pack




Locally switched, coin services 3

Lines 1 through 16 of the COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP may also be provisioned to provide dial-tone-first coin service.

Non-locally switched services 3• FXO/FXS (D4) signaling.


363-211-128Application Pack— COIN_FXO_UC LPA151Traditional DLC Interfaces

Equipment description

Application pack faceplate 3

Figure 3-8. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Faceplate

FAULT

BUSY

LPA151S1:1

Lucent

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

X

21610_fig_001dd




Application pack LED indicators 3

Table 3-7. COIN_FXO_UC LPA151 AP Faceplate LEDs

LED Function Color

FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the AP.Flashes during self-tests. Red

BUSY Indicates at least one line is off-hook. Green


363-211-128 Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMediaAccess SystemTraditional DLC Interfaces

Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System 3

Overview APs support VF services and, in addition, special service CUs are supported on the MDS2 shelf configurations for COT applications. This section includes listings of AP and CU pairing and compatibility.

Compatibility matrix

The COT (FAST and MDS2) and RT (FAST and MDS2) CU/AP combinations listed in Table 3-8 are interoperable.

Table 3-8. COT (FAST & MDS2) and RT (FAST & MDS2) CU/AP Combinations

COT RT

CU/AP Generic Signaling Function (GSFN) CU/AP GSFN

PRCOINCS LPA150

DFLT2, 2LO POTS LPA300 2LS, DFLT

DFLT2

PRCOIN LPA350

2LS, 2GS, DFLT

2LO 2LS, DFLT

COIN2 COIN

DFLT2PROG2W LPA380

2LS, 2GS, DFLT

2LO 2LS, DFLT

COIN_FXO_CU LPA151

DFLT2, 2FXOa

PRCOIN LPA350

2LS, 2GS, DFLT, 2FXS

2LOb, 2FXOLS 2LS, DFLT, 2FXSLS

COIN2 COIN

DFLT2, 2FXOa

PROG2W LPA380 ( )

2LS, 2GS, DFLT, 2FXS

2LOb, 2FXOLS 2LS, DFLT, 2FXSLS

PROG2W LPA380 2RVODPT32CS LPA356 2RVT

SPQ442 DPT, 2RVT

PRCOIN LPA350 2RVODPT32CS LPA356 2RVT

SPQ442 DPT, 2RVT


Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System


PRCOIN LPA350, PROG2W LPA380 2NOS PRCOIN LPA350,

PROG2W LPA380 2NOS

SPQ334

DS01, DS02c AUA232 (RS-232) DATA

DS01 SPQ452,ADTRAN 1433105

OCU1, OCU2, OCU3

DS02 OCU2, OCU3

SW56SPQ452 SW56

AUA200 DATA

SPQ452

OCU1

SPQ452

OCU1

OCU2 OCU2

OCU3 OCU3

SPQ328 CS EBS SPQ429 CF EBS

AUA45B AC AUA45B AC

AUA75 LR AUA75 LR

Teltrend AUA293I2 BRI Teltrend AUA293I2 BRI

MCU-5205 NO1 MCU-5205 NO1

MCU-5405 NO2 MCU-5405 NO2

SPQ442 TO

SPQ442

TO

SPQ443

FXS FXO

DPO DPT

TO TO

AUA41B

TO4 / ETO4

AUA41B

TO4

TO4 / ETO4 ETO4

DX4[N,R] DX4[N,R]

SPQ442 FXO FX[S,T][1,2,3,5]

SPQ454

EM4[C,H]DX4[N,R]

PLR[1,2]

EM4[C,H]

PLR[1,2]SPQ454

EM4[C,H]

PLR[1,2]

Table 3-8. COT (FAST & MDS2) and RT (FAST & MDS2) CU/AP Combinations (Continued)

COT RT



363-211-128 Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMediaAccess SystemTraditional DLC Interfaces

SPQ443 FXS

SPQ444

FXO[1,2,3,5]

TDS[A,B]

SPQ442FXO TDO[A,B]

DPT TD[O,S][C,D]

SPQ444

TDO[A,B]SPQ442 FXO

SPQ444 FXO[1,2,3,5]

TDS[A,B] PROG2W LPA380 2FX, 2FXLS

TD[O,S][C,D]

SPQ442 DPT

PROG2W LPA380 2RVO

AUA41B DX4[N,R]

SPQ454 EM4[C,H], PLR[1,2]

FXO[1,2,3,5] PROG2W LPA380 2FX, 2FXLS

SPQ454 EM4[C,H], PLR[1,2]SPQ442 DPT

PROG2W LPA380 2RVO

SPQ442 DPT PROG2W LPA380, PRCOIN LPA350 2RVO

SPQ442 FXO PROG2W LPA380, PRCOIN LPA350 2FX, 2FXLS

SPQ334DS01DS02 OCU LPA605 OCU4, OCU5,

OCU6

SW56 OCU LPA605 SW56Aa. The 2FXO GSFN is not applicable to UC (only applicable to TR-008 or INA).b. The 2LO GSFN is supported only by the LPA151 in UC applications.c. The following combinations are invalid because of incompatible T0 cross-connect band-

width required for each CU:SPQ-334: GSFN=DS02; RATE= 19.2, 96., 4.8, 2.4; EC=Yes; TS=2AUA232: GSFN=DATA; RATE= 19.2, 96., 4.8, 2.4; EC=Yes; TS=1

Table 3-8. COT (FAST & MDS2) and RT (FAST & MDS2) CU/AP Combinations (Continued)

COT RT



Compatibility Matrix for the Universal AnyMedia Access System


MDS2 channel units Table 3-9 lists the CUs available on the MDS2 shelf for COT and RT configurations.

Table 3-9. MDS2 Channel Units

Code COT RT Description Data Sheet

Nonprovisionable

SPQ®328 ✓Enhanced Business Service (EBS) (Tollgrade) TLGD-328Ca

SPQ429 ✓ Quad EBS (P-Phone) (Tollgrade) TLGD-429Ra

Manually Provisionable

AUA45B ✓ ✓ Dual Ringing Repeater (Manual Ring) 363-005-123

AUA75 ✓ ✓ Private Line Automatic Ring (PLAR) 363-005-132

AUA200 ✓ Two-Wire Switched 56-kbps DPX 363-005-313

AUA232 ✓ Data Services Unit Dataport (DSU DP) 363-005-312

MCU b-5205 ✓ ✓ Metallic Channel Unit (Tollgrade) TLGD5205a

MCU-5405 ✓ ✓ Digital Bypass Pair (Tollgrade) TLGD5405a

AUA293I2 ✓ ✓ ISDN BRITE (Teltrend) AUA293I2a

1433105 ✓Total Reachc DDS Dataport (DDS-DP) (ADTRAN) 61433105L1-5Da

Electronically Provisionable

SPQ442 ✓ ✓ E SPOTS Current Sink 363-005-382

SPQ443 ✓ Two-Wire Current Feed 363-005-383

SPQ444 ✓ ✓ Four-Wire CS (FXO/TDM) 363-005-385

SPQ452 ✓ ✓ Dual OCU Dataport 363-005-341

SPQ334 ✓ Dual DS0 Dataport 363-005-332

SPQ454 ✓ ✓ Four-Wire E&M/PLR 363-005-386

AUA41(B)d ✓ ✓ Four-Wire CF (FXS/ETO/DX) 363-005-105

a. Products and data sheets are available from the indicated manufacturer.b. MCU is a registered trademark of Tollgrade Communications, Inc.c. Total Reach is a registered trademark of ADTRAN, Inc.d. Requires both electronic and manual provisioning.



Traditional DLC Interfaces 4

Overview 4

This section discusses the OAM&P, testing, alarm and DS1-level transmission interfaces of the AnyMedia COT.

Page

TR-08, INA VB and UC Interfaces 4-2OAM&P Interfaces 4-8Management Interface 4-10External Interfaces for Circuit Testing 4-16Power and Miscellaneous Alarm Input Interface 4-17CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and Alarm Cutoff 4-184-18

4-174-164-104-84-2

March 2007 4-1

TR-08, INA VB and UC Interfaces363-211-128


4TR-08, INA VB and UC Interfaces 4

Overview The AnyMedia Access System COT can be configured to be logically divided into a number of separate virtual terminals that provide two types of traditional DLC service node interfaces. Twenty DS1s can be equipped and configured on the FAST shelf to provide the following terminal interfaces:

• Up to 20 Mode 1 TR-08 VCOTs

• Up to 20 INA VBs.

Both terminal types can be configured to exist at the same time, depending on the allocation of the 20 DS1s available in the FAST shelf.

Note: For details using the AnyMedia Universal Concentrator (UC) in a VCOT-to-VRT configuration, see UC VCOTs (or VRTs) on page 4-6.

System capacity (subscriber lines)

An AnyMedia Access System application that provides multiple VCOT and INA access service via a fiber optic transport facility is shown in Figure 4-1. The capacity of the terminal interfaces is determined by the number of DS1s equipped in a FAST shelf and the number of telephony APs in the FAST shelf and CUs installed in the MDS2 shelf.

Figure 4-1. FAST Shelf VCOT and VB POTS Access Services

The AnyMedia Access System supports 20 DS1s, and each DS1 can support 24 subscribers per DS1, for a capacity of 480 subscribers:

20 DS1s x 24 subscribers/DS1 = 480 subscribers


363-211-128TR-08, INA VB and UC InterfacesTraditional DLC Interfaces

Example: FAST shelf only 4

When the 15 APs are installed in the FAST shelf and all the APs are 32 POTS lines APs, the shelf can provide up to a maximum of 480 lines of POTS service:

15 APs x 32 POTS lines/AP = 480 POTS lines

Also, it is possible to install 16 APs in the FAST shelf; however, it is still only possible to use a total of 480 lines.

Example: FAST shelf and MDS2 shelf 4

When the FAST shelf is equipped with 12 32-line POTS APs and two MDSU circuit packs, which serves 96 channels at the MDS2 shelf (24 CUs with 4 channels each), the FAST shelf can provide up to a maximum of 480 lines of service:

(12 APs x 32 POTS lines/AP) + (24 CUs x 4 lines/CU) = 480 lines

Also, it is possible to install 14 APs in the FAST shelf; however, it is still only possible to use a total of 480 lines (Note: In a UC configuration with MDSU circuit packs 544 lines).

VCOT feeder network

Several feeder network configurations can be installed external to the shelf, which include either of the following:

• Point-to-point or ring SONET multiplexer transport networks

• Metallic feeder distribution

• Any transport system with a DSX-1 interface (e.g., microwave radio)

Each of the IODS1 circuit packs provides four DS1 line interfaces. Installing five IODS1 circuit packs, plus a protection pack, enables equipping the shelf with up to 20 DS1s. This provides 1:5 pack protection.

TR-08 VCOTS and INA VBs

An AnyMedia COT FAST shelf can be subdivided into up to 20 TR-08 VCOTs or INA virtual banks (VBs), or combinations of the two, which can support up to 20 DS1 facilities and 480 subscriber lines. Any one of the 20 physical DS1 facilities can be assigned to any VCOT or VB, and any one of the physical subscriber lines can be assigned to any VCOT or VB.

The AnyMedia COT system capacities can be summarized as follows:

• Up to 5 TR-08 systems with 4 DS1 facilities per system

• Up to 20 TR-08 systems with 1 DS1 facility per system

• Up to 20 INA VBs




• 480 subscriber lines.

A TR-08 VCOT can have from one to four DS1s, designated DS1-A, DS1-B, DS1-C and DS1-D. DS1-A carries the VCOT data link for alarm reporting, test messages, and loopback.

A TR-08 VCOT can carry up to 96 lines of service when it is equipped with four DS1s. The actual number of TR-08 VCOTs that can be supported in an AnyMedia Access System depends on the available feeder DS1s allocated for TR-08 interfaces.

The VCOT emulates the TR-08 mode 1 non concentrating switch interface toward the RTs. DS0 channels serving the metallic lines from the switch are mapped to the DS1s via the COMDAC time slot interchange (TSI) function. No per-call processing is performed in the COMDAC for the COT application.

The AP sources the appropriate signaling bits in the COT to RT direction and converts the RT to COT signaling into the appropriate line condition toward the switch.

TR-08 interfaces The AnyMedia Access System can be configured to provide multiple TR-08 VCOTs depending on the available shelf DS1s allocated for TR-08 interfaces. The four DS1s can be on the same IODS1 circuit pack or on different packs. Figure 4-2 indicates the generic interfaces of a TR-08 VCOT. The AnyMedia Access System can interface the analog interface of a local switch. A TR-08 Mode 1 VCOT can serve a maximum of 96 subscriber lines and can have a maximum of 4 DS1s. There can be one to four DS1s in a TR-08 VCOT. Each DS1 has 24 channels that can be cross-connected to lines on APs. DS1 failure indications are monitored and reported to the COMDAC pack for local and remote alarm reporting.

DS1-A of each VCOT carries a bit-oriented data link that carries alarm messages and channel and RT drop testing messages. Each VCOT requires a DS1-A. The DS1s of a TR-08 VCOT can be mapped to any IODS1 physical line, and the 96 lines can be mapped to any physical subscriber lines on the APs supporting POTS type services. The mappings are controlled through user provisioning and are handled by COMDAC software.



Figure 4-2. TR-08 Interfaces

INA virtual banks The AnyMedia Access System COT supports up to 20 INA VBs. An INA VB provides support for nonswitched or nonlocally switched special services. INA DS1s are feeder facilities of an access system that primarily carry these nonswitched or nonlocally switched special services. INA DS1s usually do not connect to the local switching system and, instead, can terminate on digital channel banks (e.g., D4, D5), on a DACS, on interoffice facilities, or possibly on another AnyMedia Access System. In AnyMedia universal applications, an INA VB at the COT is T1 cross-connected to the corresponding INA VB at the RT. Up to 480 customer lines can be supported on INA VBs:

20 DS1s x 24 lines/DS1 = 480 lines

For INA applications, required special service channels are cross-connected to the applicable INA virtual bank DS0s. The shelf provides the flexibility to cross-connect any subscriber line to any INA DS1.

INA virtual bank interfaces

In the AnyMedia Access System, customer lines can be provisioned (via the OS interface or the CIT interface) to be connected to the INA VBs. An INA VB may have its DS1 connected to a DACS, a channel bank, or the interoffice special services network for handling of nonswitched and nonlocally switched special services circuits. From 1 to 20 DS1s can be assigned to support INA VBs. These DS1s are in the same common pool of 20 DS1s that are available for the TR-08 VRTs. Any one of the physical DS1 ports of the IODS1 packs can be designated as an INA DS1. The IODS1 terminates the DS1 line signal and also the DS1 framing. Framing of INA DS1s can be ESF or SF, as required by the terminal interface. DS1 failure indications are monitored and reported to the COMDAC pack for local and remote alarm reporting.




From the IODS1 pack, DS0s are extracted from the payload and routed to the COMDAC for further processing. On the COMDAC, the DS0s and signaling are processed though the TSI and then sent to the APs where the lines reside. The reverse is performed for transmitting DS0s onto DS1s.

UC VCOTs (or VRTs)

The AnyMedia Universal Concentrator (UC) is used in a VCOT-to-VRT configuration and supports a maximum of 512 lines (limited by analog lines at the COT) across 5 UC VCOTs/VRTs, see Figure 4-3 on page 4-7. Depending on system provisioning, in the UC configuration up to five primary and secondary UC control links can be supported. The maximum number of ROC channels is five (one ROC channel per UC VRT), therefore in the UC configuration up to 15 of 480 DS0s are reserved for 10 control links and for 5 ROCs.

In the UC configuration the AnyMedia COT maintains support for any combination within the bounds of 20 DS1s of

• up to 5 UC VCOTs

• up to 20 GR-008 VCOTs

• up to 20 INA VBs.

Note: In a UC configuration combined with MDSU circuit packs a maximum of 544 lines are supported.

UC VCOT/VRT interfaces

The AnyMedia UC in a VCOT-to-VRT configuration is provisioned in exactly the same manner as any other VRT (using existing TL1 commands).

The connection control is performed via message exchange between UC VCOT and UC VRT. The UC VCOT serves as the connection “master” by selecting the DS1/DS0 combination to be used for a particular connection. For this part, the UC VRT informs the UC VCOT of subscriber loop activity (on/off-hook) and makes/breaks the connection as specified by the UC VCOT.

The primary UC control link is used for passing the connection control messages between the UC VCOT and UC VRT. This control link is fixed in the timeslot DS0 # 16 of the logical feeder DS1 # 1 of each UC VCOT/VRT, while in a 2-control link UC system the secondary control link resides on the timeslot DS0 # 16 of the logical feeder DS1 # 2. The protocol (Q.931) is used for the UC control link.

The UC control link is redundant if more than one DS1 is used for the UC VCOT/VRT connection. A failure of the primary UC control link will result in an automatic switch to the secondary link. The UC software monitors the state of the UC control link and raises an alarm if UC control link is not operational. In this way the UC mismatch to the UC VCOT/VRT is also verified via UC control link alarms.



Figure 4-3. AnyMedia Universal Concentrator (Typical Configuration UC VCOT/VRT)

21610_fig_033f

UCVCOT

1

1

COTShelf

X

Local

SwitchUC

VCOT2

1

Y

UCVCOT

5

1

Z

T0

Cro

ss-c

on

necti

on

T1

Cro

ss-c

on

necti

on

Service Node

1

A

1

B

1

C

1

2

3

512

511

Max. support ofX+Y+Z=20 DS1sshared by up to5 UC VCOT/VRTs

UCVRT

1

1

A

UCVRT

1

1

B

UCVRT

1

1

C

RT Shelf 1

RT Shelf 2

RT Shelf 5

A+B+C= 512 physical subscriberlines shared by up to 5 UC VRTs

1

X

1

Z

1

Y

Max. Support of


OAM&P Interfaces363-211-128


4OAM&P Interfaces 4

Overview The OAM&P interfaces to the COT FAST shelf for traditional DLC applications are as follows:

• CIT port

• ATU interface

• LAN interface

• UCC interface.

A management station (e.g., GSI or TL1SI) operates over the CIT, LAN, and UCC OAM&P interfaces.

CIT port The CIT port is a local EIA-232E/574 port on the CTU in the AnyMedia FAST shelf to which a TL1SI or a GSI can be connected. The CIT port works in either the TL1SI and PPP modes, which are selectable by the user after the connection is established. If the PPP mode is selected, the OAM&P transactions take place over a TCP/IP connection.

Typically, this interface is used during initial installation and during other maintenance related activities.

Alarm and PGTC interface

The AnyMedia FAST shelf provides an EIA-232E/574-compatible interface on the FAST shelf backplane to which the ATU is connected. The ATU provides a parallel alarm telemetry interface and interfaces for office alarms. It also provides access to a bypass pair and an interface to the PGTC for testing purposes.

LAN interface The LAN interface to the FAST shelf may be accessed locally, either at the shelf or via a backplane connector on the FAST shelf. This IEEE 802.3 compliant interface provides access to a LAN through a 10BaseT connection. A factory shipped AnyMedia Access System will have a jumper cable installed from the backplane connection to a jack on the FCM to allow for front access to the LAN. For permanent LAN access, this jumper cable must be disconnected at the backplane, and the LAN connection can be made between the backplane and the PC, router, or hub. All communications through this interface will be over TCP/IP. This alternative is expected to be used if the system is installed in locations where an Ethernet LAN already exists and a sufficient number of host IP addresses are available.


363-211-128OAM&P InterfacesTraditional DLC Interfaces

Universal communications channel

The universal communications channel (UCC) enables an OAM&P communication path to be established between the AnyMedia COT and an AnyMedia RT for OAM&P transactions. A UCC is implemented by connecting a remote operations channel (ROC) at the RT end and a corresponding ROC channel at the COT end, as illustrated in Figure 4-4. Note in Figure 4-4 that as many as 5 UCCs may be provisioned to communicate through a single AnyMedia COT, one for each supported VRT.

A UCC enables the user to establish OAM&P connectivity to the RT without having to be present at the RT site. The management station may be physically located at the COT or connected to the COT remotely via a data communication network (DCN).

The AnyMedia® Access System, Commands and Procedures online documentation includes in the section titled Operations Management, UCC Access, a procedure to establish a dedicated DS0 for each UCC.

Figure 4-4. COT Operations Gateway


Management Interface363-211-128


4Management Interface 4

Overview The AnyMedia Access System has a convenient Management Interface, which is used for managing traditional DLC services.

The Management Interface allows the technician to provision a single NE at a time through the GSI, while simultaneously monitoring alarms of multiple NEs through the Network Maintenance Manager.

GSI 4

The GSI for the AnyMedia Access System is a software tool that provides a graphical interface to support the OAM&P functions. When the GSI is connected to the CIT or LAN interfaces at the COT, the GSI provides a graphical view of the AnyMedia FAST shelf, as shown in Figure 4-5 on page 4-11.

Network Maintenance Manager 4

The Network Maintenance Manager is used to monitor alarms over multiple NEs. The Network Maintenance Manager allows a technician to choose which NEs to monitor, to filter viewed alarms, and to manage the display of these alarms. Figure 4-6 on page 4-12 shows the options in Network Maintenance Manager window.

The Network Maintenance Manager is accessed remotely by choosing it through the Management Interface, or through a button or pull-down menu on the GSI. In this way, a technician may go back and forth from multiple to single NEs as needed to check and administer to the alarms.

GSI description Whether accessing the system remotely or locally, a technician using the GSI sees a graphical representation of the COT FAST shelf, as shown in Figure 4-5. The GSI has buttons and pull-down menus that are used to monitor and manage the equipment, as shown in Figure 4-7. The technician can select a specific operation and run any of the TL1 commands for it with simple button clicks. The technician also can launch a TL1SI view window through the GSI and enter command-line messages.

GSI operations interfaces

The serial port on the PC is used for local access to the CTU CIT port. TL1 commands are used for all OAM&P functions (listed in Chapter 5, OAM&P For Traditional DLC Services). If the PC is equipped with a LAN card, the GSI software also can be used to access the system locally or remotely via the LAN interface.


363-211-128Management InterfaceTraditional DLC Interfaces

GSI selections The technician performs the system operations through the GSI by selecting an operation in a pull-down menu, as Figure 4-7 shows. This action also can be performed by selecting the TL1 Cmds button on the GSI, which launches a list of all the TL1 commands as buttons, as Figure 4-8 shows. Then the technician is able to click on the TL1 command necessary to perform the operation.

Figure 4-5. GSI Representation of the COT FAST Shelf and ATU




Figure 4-6. Network Maintenance Manager Interface

Figure 4-7. Pull-Down Menu for Selecting GSI Operations



Figure 4-8. TL1 Commands Window

GSI operation areas The GSI supports the operations that manage the AnyMedia Access System functional areas. The GSI allows a technician to select an operation and its associated TL1 commands in the following areas:

• All Commands—provides all the TL1 commands for the operations (Configuration Management, Fault Management, Performance Management, Security Management) in one list.

• Configuration Management—operations that control and provision the system, which includes memory management, software management, service provisioning, inventory management, and initialization.




• Fault Management—operations that maintain the system, which includes fault detection, fault isolation, correction of abnormal operations, protection switching, alarm reporting, and testing. Alarm conditions appear on the status bar along with an audible beep. After an alarm is detected, a message that explains how to proceed appears in a pop-up message box.

• Performance Management—operations to evaluate and report on the performance of the system and the system’s components.

• Security Management—operations that protect the system from unauthorized access, which includes security administration, password maintenance and changes, and access status reports.

In the GSI, autonomous messages generated by the system notify the user about system events as the events occur. Autonomous messages include alarm notifications, database changes, threshold crossings, and other system events.

Network Maintenance Manager description

The Network Maintenance Manager is selected as an option when a technician selects the Management Interface icon, or through the GSI via a pull-down menu or a button. The Network Maintenance Manager is invoked when the technician wants to monitor many network elements (NEs) instead of just one, but the technician also has the option to return to a single network element to address alarms.

Network Maintenance Manager operations

When using the Network Maintenance Manager, it accesses the NEs through a connection on the rear of the backplane via an Ethernet LAN card to the system’s network TCP/IP connection for remote access.

Network Maintenance Manager selections

When using the Network Maintenance Manager, the technician performs the system operations by selecting the tabs or pull-down selections needed to see the system alarms by severity or alarm status. A technician can choose options that show the alarms displayed by system and/or severity and the alarm status. The Network Maintenance Manager also gives the technician the option to see alarms that are on the COMDAC. The technician can start and stop monitoring the alarms at any time.



Figure 4-9 on page 4-15 shows a sample of the alarms captured using the Network Maintenance Manager.

Figure 4-9. A Graphical Representation of the Alarms Collected Using the Network Maintenance Manager

User operations The AnyMedia COT and RT GSI sessions can be maintained simultaneously in separate windows, and the user can press the ALT and TAB keys simultaneously to alternate between them.

If the UCC is provisioned, the user can manage the RT while connected to the COT.



External Interfaces for Circuit Testing363-211-128


4External Interfaces for Circuit Testing 4

Overview The AnyMedia Access System provides the following external interfaces for circuit testing:

• Local access for manual testing is provided via test access jacks on the front of the CTU (two-wire circuits) or on the MDS2 (two-, four-, or six-wire circuits).

• The ATU provides access to the digital or metallic bypass pair for PGTC testing and an interface to the PGTC for channel and RT drop testing.


363-211-128Power and Miscellaneous Alarm Input InterfaceTraditional DLC Interfaces

41Power and Miscellaneous Alarm Input Interface 4

Power The AnyMedia Access System COT requires external DC and ringing voltage sources.

Alarm inputs Each CTU provides eight miscellaneous alarm input detectors, which terminate up to eight alarm relay closure inputs per FAST shelf from the power shelf. For a bay populated with four CTUs, each CTU can terminate five different alarm relay closure inputs and three multiple alarm relay closure inputs. The alarm attributes that are reported for the individual miscellaneous input detectors on the CTU are provisionable via the GSI, TL1SI, or OS/EM interface.

CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and Alarm Cutoff363-211-128


4CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and Alarm Cutoff 4

Overview The AnyMedia Access System provides alarm output closures to indicate each of the severe alarm states (critical, major, or minor) in the system. For local alarms, one set, each, is provided for visual and audible alarm indications. For remote alarm monitoring, alarm outputs to the remote telemetry system are normally provided via the ATU, though a subset is also available at the CTU.

Local alarm output closures

The system provides two separate sets (1 visual, 1 audible) of locally available alarm output closures for the following alarm indications:

Each set of alarm closures indicates the most severe alarm state (critical, major, or minor) in the system consisting of the COT, RT and the interconnecting DS1 facilities. The CO alarm output closures are located on both the CTU and ATU.

If available, the closures on the ATU should be used to drive office alarms and remote alarm systems.

Remote alarm output closures

The ATU provides a set of 42 alarm closures for output to the remote telemetry system to indicate the most severe alarm state (critical, major, or minor) and to identify the system reporting the alarm. A subset of alarm closures is provided at the CTU (see COT Alarm Engineering on page 6-35) for use by systems that are not equipped with an ATU.

Characteristics of alarm closures

Local and remote alarm closures have the following characteristics:

• Maximum switching current, 1A

• Maximum switching voltage, 110V DC, 125V AC

• Maximum switching power, 30W, 37.5VA.

Location Critical Major Minor Power Minor

ATU x x x x

CTU x x x


363-211-128 CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and AlarmCutoffTraditional DLC Interfaces

Alarm cutoff The system supports an alarm cutoff (ACO) function that, when activated, retires the audible CO and remote alarm output closures. The ACO function does not retire the visual CO and system ID for remote alarm output closures.

The ACO function can be activated via the ACO button on the CTU faceplate, an Operate-Alarm Cutoff TL1 command, or a remote ACO (RACO) input signal from the remote telemetry system.

The ACO indicator on the CTU is illuminated when the ACO function is activated. The ACO function is terminated and the ACO indicator is extinguished when either of the following occur:

• All alarms are retired

• A new alarm (with higher severity) occurs.

In the latter case, the audible CO and remote alarm closures are reactivated.

Remote alarm cutoff

The AnyMedia COT supports the capability to perform a remote alarm cutoff (RACO). A RACO has the same effect as ACO except that it is not actuated by a push-button locally on the CTU. RACO is actuated at the AnyMedia COT either by a telemetry system relay closure or by TL1 message (OPR-ACO). Standard operating procedure for a remote maintenance center is to send RACO after logging incoming alarm information. This helps to avoid ambiguity if a subsequent failure occurs before the existing ones have been cleared. If the telemetry relay closure RACO is required, the telemetry RACO lead can be wired to either the ATU or the CTU (if an ATU is not deployed). The connection to the AnyMedia CTU is made by the COT FAST shelf backplane J110 connector. The connection to the ATU is made via the ATU RACO lead. The local ACO indicator LED on the COT FAST shelf CTU illuminates when the RACO detector on the ATU or CTU is actuated (or TL1 RACO message is received) and remains illuminated until all system alarms retire or new alarms are activated.

Alarm closure behavior on power loss

The CO and remote alarm output closures are fail-safe to handle a loss of power condition. In the powered-down state, the following alarm output closures are automatically activated by hardware:

• Critical (audible CO)

• Critical (visual CO)

• Critical (remote)

• Source ID (remote).


CO/Remote Alarm Output Closures and Alarm Cutoff363-211-128




OAM&P For Traditional DLC Services 5

Overview 5

This section discusses the OAM&P operations of the AnyMedia Access System for traditional DLC services.

.

Page

Configuration Management 5-2Configuration Management— Software Management 5-3Configuration Management— Service Activation 5-4Configuration Management—Provisioning 5-10Configuration Management— Line Termination Provisioning 5-11Configuration Management—Application Pack Provisioning 5-16Configuration Management— Default POTS Line Loss 5-22Configuration Management— Synchronization Provisioning 5-25Fault Management 5-29Fault Management—Maintenance 5-30Fault Management—Alarms and Events 5-33Fault Management—Protection Switching 5-39Fault Management—Testing 5-42Performance Management 5-445-44

5-425-395-335-305-295-255-225-165-115-105-45-35-2

March 2007 5-1


Configuration Management363-211-128


5Configuration Management 5

Overview Configuration Management is the system activity for operations that control and provision the system, including the following:

• Memory administration—used to manage the NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System (see the AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning and Ordering Guide for details)

• Software management—used to manage the NVPS of the system

• Service provisioning—process of preparing an AP port circuit for service by defining the AP’s function and setting its parameters

• COT default NVDS provisioning—used during turn-up procedures to automatically provision T1 and T0 cross-connects and environmental alarms to one of three standard configurations

• COT-specific GSI scripts—used during turn-up procedures as an alternative to COT default NVDS provisioning

• Inventory management—system activity of collecting, updating, and reporting data on system equipage and system status (see the AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning and Ordering Guide for details)

• Synchronization provisioning—controls the synchronization mode of the AnyMedia Access System and its synchronization reference sources.


363-211-128 Configuration Management— SoftwareManagementTraditional DLC Interfaces

5Configuration Management—Software Management 5

Overview Software management is used to manage the NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System.

NVPS The system has reprogrammable program memories. One program memory resides in each COMDAC circuit pack. If the system is in a simplex configuration, the system has one copy of program memory. If the system is in a duplex configuration, the system has two copies of program memory.

The system routinely audits the integrity of the NVPS. If the system is in a simplex configuration, the system checks the checksum of the NVPS. If the system is in a duplex configuration, the system checks the program version of both copies of the NVPS.

Program storage The NVPS in the COMDAC circuit pack is reprogrammable. The system is capable of modifying these reprogrammable program memories through a COMDAC software download operation.

If the system is in a simplex configuration, the software download is through either the GSI interface or an OS, and the software download may impact on a subscriber service.

If the system is in a duplex configuration, the software download is through either the GSI interface or an OS, and the software download has no impact on a subscriber service.

When the software download is through a GSI interface, the percentage of download completion is displayed on the GSI screen throughout the download operation.

Software delivery A new software release can be deployed to the system by the following methods:

• Electronic transfer of the software version from an OS to the COMDAC

• Electronic transfer through the GSI interface to the COMDAC.

Configuration Management— Service Activation363-211-128


5Configuration Management—Service Activation 5

Overview Service activation is the process of preparing the AnyMedia Access System for service by configuring the cross-connections between its bandwidth management entities (e.g., feeder resources, VCOTs, and VBs) and setting any required options.

Provisioning summary

Prior to service activation on the AnyMedia Access System, several data items need to be provisioned. It is necessary to configure cross-connects between physical DS1 lines and VCOTs within the system, as well as cross-connects between VCOTs and physical subscriber lines. In addition, it is necessary to specify the service type of the subscriber lines because some APs or CUs for the AnyMedia Access System can provide several types of service.

Much of the required provisioning can be performed automatically via a set of TL1 commands, which are provided exclusively for system turn-up. Command options are provided to preconfigure the system for TR-08 POTS applications. Alternatively, the provisioning can be performed manually or by an external operations system.

Figure 5-1 is a conceptual diagram of the cross-connections between the physical (DS1 and subscriber) lines of the system and the VCOTs/VBs. The AnyMedia Access System supports up to 20 TR-08 VCOTs, up to 20 INA VBs, and up to 5 UC VCOTs in any combination not exceeding 20 feeder DS1s.

DS1 to VCOT/VB cross-connection

T1 cross-connections provide feeder bandwidth to VCOTs and VBs. The T1 cross-connections are created by a TL1 command. A maximum of 20 T1 cross-connections can be created. They are limited by the maximum number of DS1 feeder lines in the system.

DS0 to subscriber line cross-connection

T0 cross-connections bind a subscriber line (a tip/ring pair) to a VCOT or VB. T0 cross-connections are created by a TL1 command. A maximum of 609* T0 cross-connections can be created. However, the total system limit is 480 lines. These may be assigned to any combination of up to 480 FAST AP ports and/or 96 MDS2 ports and/or 20 UCCs, with the total no greater than 480.

* Not all 609 connections can be put into service.


363-211-128Configuration Management— Service ActivationTraditional DLC Interfaces

In an AnyMedia universal concentrator (UC) configuration the total system limit is 512 lines plus up to 5 ROCs shared by up to 5 UC VCOTs in a COT shelf. These may be assigned to any combination of up to 512 FAST AP ports.

Figure 5-1. Conceptual Diagram of Cross-Connects within the AnyMedia Access System

VCOTs VCOTs are a key to the flexibility of the AnyMedia Access System COT. Each TR-08 VCOT appears as a terminal supplying up to 96 tip-ring pairs. Each single UC VCOT provides up to 512 tip-ring pairs. The multiple VCOTs and INA VBs provide flexibility for load balancing of switch interfaces, for incremental growth of switch resources, for collocated competitive access by a network service provider, and for grooming of special service circuits away from the switch.

Within the AnyMedia Access System, each VCOT contains the provisioning data for its DS1 lines and subscriber lines. T1 and T0 cross-connections provide the linkage between the provisioning data and the corresponding physical interfaces. A conceptual diagram of the TR-08 VCOT is shown in Figure 5-2 on page 5-6. This figure indicates the AIDs, which are referenced for provisioning activities on the VCOT. Similar diagrams for INA VBs and UC VCOTs are shown in Figure 5-3 on page 5-6 and Figure 5-4 on page 5-7.

TR-08VirtualCentralOffice

Terminal

TR-08VirtualCentralOffice

Terminal

INAVirtualBank

21610_fig_036bb

DS1Ports

IODS1CircuitPack

IODS1CircuitPack

IODS1CircuitPack

IODS1CircuitPack

IODS1CircuitPack

ApplicationPack

ChannelUnit 24

ChannelUnit 1

ApplicationPack

ApplicationPack

ApplicationPack

ApplicationPack

ApplicationPack

T1Cross-

Connection

T0Cross-

Connection

SubscriberPorts

UCVirtualCentralOffice

Terminal




Each VCOT (or VB) contains one or more logical feeder lines and a number of logical lines. The logical feeder lines can be cross-connected to the physical DS1 lines of the system. The logical lines can be cross-connected to the physical subscriber lines.

Figure 5-2. Conceptual Diagram of TR-08 VCOTs

Figure 5-3. Conceptual Diagram of INA VBs



Figure 5-4. Conceptual Diagram of Single UC VCOT

The maximum number of cross-connections is limited by the number of physical DS1 ports and facilities in the system.

Each logical feeder line contains provisioning data for its associated DS1 interface, which are administered through TL1 commands. When a physical DS1 line is T1 cross-connected to a VCOT or VB, it takes on the characteristics defined by the T1 data for that VCOT or VB (e.g., if a physical DS1 line is connected to the TR-08 VCOT, it will operate with SF framing).

Each logical line may contain provisioning data for its associated physical subscriber line, which are also administered through several TL1 commands. When a physical subscriber line is T0 cross-connected to a VCOT or VB, it takes on the characteristics defined by the T0 data for the corresponding logical line (e.g., if a line from an PROG2W AP is cross-connected to a logical line that is provisioned for POTS service, it provides a loop-start interface; if the line is then cross-connected to a logical line that is provisioned for ground-start FX service, it provides a ground-start interface).

The system will support a combined maximum of 672 T0 records among all VCOTs and VBs. This number exceeds the total number of physical subscriber lines that the system supports; the extra records are available for rollover applications.

Physical ports The physical ports of the AnyMedia Access System COT provide feeder DS1 connections and subscriber tip/ring pairs. The physical ports are associated with IODS1 circuit packs and APs or CUs, respectively. A conceptual model of the DS1 lines is shown in Figure 5-5. This figure indicates the AIDs that are referenced when T1 cross-connections are provisioned to the DS1 physical ports.

21610_fig_35hh

T0Data

T0Data

ucdp-{1}-1

ucdp-{1}-2

ucdp-{1}-512

ucdp-{1}-513T0

Data

T0Data

ucfdr-{1}-2T1Data

Logical Lines UC Logical Feeder Ports

ucfdr-{1}-1T1Data

ucfdr-{1}-20T1Data




Figure 5-5. Access Identifier Codes for Physical IODS1 Ports

A similar conceptual diagram for the subscriber ports associated with the APs and CUs is shown in Figure 5-6.



Figure 5-6. Conceptual Diagram of Subscriber Ports in the AnyMedia Access System


Configuration Management—Provisioning363-211-128


514Configuration Management—Provisioning 5

Overview The following provisioning capabilities are provided by the AnyMedia Access System are described in this chapter:

• Line termination provisioning

• Application pack provisioning

• Default POTS line loss.

Details about MDS2 channel unit provisioning are in the AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement—MDS2 Shelf Configurations.


363-211-128 Configuration Management— Line TerminationProvisioningTraditional DLC Interfaces

514Configuration Management—Line Termination Provisioning 5

Overview Line termination provisioning is the process of preparing a subscriber port circuit for service by defining its function and setting any required options.

Service provisioning considerations

Traditional DLC services include traditional message telephone service, analog and digital special services, and basic rate ISDN service. The subscriber interfaces for these services are supported via several APs and CUs on the FAST and MDS2 shelves. The APs contain no physical option switches; instead, their function is controlled by electronic service provisioning information that is stored nonvolatilely in the AnyMedia Access System. Software in the AnyMedia Access System compares this stored service provisioning information with the equipped APs and, if they are compatible, the software conditions the AP hardware to provide the desired service.

The AnyMedia Access System also supports electronic provisioning of CUs used in the MDS2 shelf. However, some MDS2 CUs may require manual provisioning of switch options.

The following significant pieces of information are required to provision service on any interface:

• The physical subscriber port must be assigned to a logical line on an in-service (TR-08, UC) VCOT or to a logical DS0 on an INA VB. This assignment is represented by a T0 cross-connection.

• Transmission and signaling parameters for the desired service must be provided. The information is represented by a T0 provisioning record.

For those lines served by TR-08 VCOTs, UC VCOTs, or INA VBs, the information must be entered via a TL1 provisioning command. The information can be entered by an OS, or it can be entered manually through a local or remote TL1SI/GSI.

The AnyMedia Access System associates the transmission and signaling parameters (the T0 records) with the logical lines of the system. The logical line-to-physical port assignment information (the T0 cross-connections) permits the system software to transfer these parameters to the correct AP hardware.

Physical-to-logical port provisioning

To establish service on a subscriber port of the AnyMedia Access System, the physical subscriber port must be assigned to a logical line on a (TR-08, UC) VCOT or INA VB within the system. The AnyMedia Access System may contain up to 20 TR-08 VCOTs/INA VBs and five UC VCOTs in any combination, subject to the limit imposed by the 20 available DS1 network interfaces. A physical


Configuration Management— Line Termination Provisioning


subscriber port may be assigned to only 1 logical line on 1 (TR-08, UC) VCOT or INA VB. Similarly, a logical line can be assigned to only 1 physical subscriber port, which may have both physical switches and/or electronic provisioning. A discussion of provisioning MDS2 CUs is provided in AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement - MDS2 Shelf Configurations (363-211-106).

A TR-08 VCOT supports up to 96 logical lines and a maximum of 96 physical lines. The logical lines are identified by LLNs, which are integer values ranging from 1 to 96. A physical subscriber port may be assigned to any LLN within any TR-08 VCOT.

An INA VB supports 24 logical DS0 timeslots and a maximum of 24 physical lines. The logical DS0 timeslots are numbered from 1 to 24. A physical subscriber port may be assigned to any logical DS0 within any INA VB.

A UC VCOT supports up to 512 logical DS0 for assigning logical lines to a physical port. The association of feeder DS0 to physical port is done dynamically on a per call basis.

The association between logical lines and physical lines can be changed by deleting a cross-connection and entering a new cross-connection. This permits the physical appearance of a logical line to be easily moved from one physical port to another physical port without changing the serving switch’s database.

Transmission and signaling parameter provisioning

Transmission and signaling information must be provided for each subscriber port prior to service availability (i.e., the AnyMedia Access System provides no default provisioning). However, as described later in this section, the AnyMedia Access System provides a specialized TL1 command that enables you to preprovision all lines of the system at turn-up time. This preprovisioning capability is sufficient to establish service for an all-POTS system without further per-line provisioning.

The CUs used in the MDS2 shelf typically require provisioning of transmission and signaling parameters. For those units that support electronic provisioning, this function can be accomplished using appropriate TL1 messages. Those CUs that have physical switches require manual provisioning before being mounted in the MDS2 shelf. Provisioning information is provided in the AnyMedia® Access System Feature Supplement —MDS2 Shelf Configurations.

Preset configurations

The AnyMedia Access System enables you to use one TL1 command to configure an entire COT shelf as 5 TR-08 VCOTs or 5 UC VCOTS using ED-VEQPT (vcfg2 or vcfg5). The same preset configurations also can be provisioned manually by using individual TL1 commands or by using the GSI scripting capability. If the required AnyMedia Access System configuration does not coincide exactly with the preset configuration, the needed configuration may be reached by starting with the default configuration and then using TL1 commands to edit the system.



NOTE:ED-VEQPT (vcfg1, vcfg3, and vcfg4) are not applicable to the COT FAST shelf.

Per-line provisioning

The per-line provisioning information may be entered via TL1 commands from a remote OS, GSI, or a TL1SI. The TL1 interface acts on a single instance of the AnyMedia Access System’s nonvolatile data store so that absolute provisioning information integrity is maintained within the system, regardless of the source of a provisioning data change.

The TL1 provisioning information is aligned with Telcordia Technologies, Inc. GR-199. The per-subscriber information consists of a CLEI code, a generic signaling function (GSFN) code that specifies the circuit’s signaling protocol, and a variable number of additional parameters specific to each GSFN code.

The CLEI code information is not required to provide service. The CLEI field may be used if desired to indicate the intended AP type for a service. However, the system software will not deny service to a subscriber port because the provisioned CLEI code does not match the equipped CLEI code of an AP. The CLEI field may remain empty without affecting the service capability of a subscriber port.

Additional transmission and signaling parameters may be required for per-line provisioning, depending upon the GSFN code of the circuit being provisioned. The system software compares the transmission and signaling information for each logical line with the associated AP hardware. If the hardware is compatible with the provisioned GSFN code and the associated parameters, the appropriate information is transferred to the hardware registers and the line is placed in service.

GSFN codes GSFN codes are discussed in Configuration Management—Application Pack Provisioning on page 5-16. That section identifies the GSFN codes that can be used only in RT applications, the codes that can be used only in COT applications, and the codes that can be used in both RT and COT applications.

MDS2 provisioning The CUs used in the MDS2 shelf typically require provisioning of transmission and signaling parameters. For those units that support electronic provisioning, the AnyMedia Access System accomplishes this provisioning via appropriate TL1 messages. However, some CUs have physical switches that require manual provisioning prior to insertion in the MDS2 shelf. Detailed information on


Configuration Management— Line Termination Provisioning


provisioning of CUs is provided in AnyMedia® Access System, Feature Supplement - MDS2 Shelf Configurations (363-211-106)

Provisioning service activation

Service activation for traditional DLC services requires that feeder and subscriber ports be associated with a VCOT/VB through T1 and T0 cross-connections, respectively, and that T0 provisioning data be entered for the desired service. Finally, the required physical circuit packs must be equipped. Figure 5-1 represents the composite provisioning data required to bring a single subscriber line into service on a TR-08 VCOT, with examples of the associated TL1 commands.

.

Figure 5-1. Provisioning Data for a TR-08 POTS Subscriber Line

TR-08 VCOTs are not concentrated. They can support from 1 to 4 DS1 inputs and from 1 to 96 subscriber lines. A sufficient set of DS1 inputs must be provided in a TR-08 VCOT to support the set of subscriber lines assigned to the VCOT.

The AnyMedia Access System imposes few restrictions on line termination provisioning. Therefore, it is possible to define some unusual combinations of VCOTs/VBs and services (e.g., a coin line may be provisioned in an INA VB, although such a configuration may have no practical application).

The AnyMedia Access System has limited provisioning memory capacity that can accommodate provisioning records for up to 672 subscriber lines. Because the



memory capacity is greater than the maximum number of physical lines that can be supported by the system, two provisioning records can be created for a limited number of lines during load balancing or service rollover operations.

Bundled T0 cross-connections

Several special services require more than one facility DS0 timeslot. Examples are:

• Dataport service with second-channel error correction (EC=SCEC)

• Digital bypass circuits for remote drop testing.

When these services are supported on a TR-08 VCOT or on an INA VB, they must be associated with more than one feeder timeslot. These multiple-DS0 associations are referred to as bundled T0 cross-connections. Bundled T0 cross-connections are administered by the same TL1 commands as are single T0 cross-connections.


Configuration Management—Application Pack Provisioning


5Configuration Management—Application Pack Provisioning 5

Overview The logical lines of VCOTs/VBs in the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned with appropriate T0 data to activate subscriber service. The system provides no default T0 provisioning data. However, the system can be preprovisioned for 480 POTS interfaces at the FAST shelf using the ED-VEQPT TL1 command during turn-up.

The T0 data are stored in nonvolatile data memory on the COMDAC circuit pack and transferred to the associated AP or CU as needed. The T0 data can be entered and modified via the ENT-T0, ED-T0, RTRV-T0, and DLT-T0 TL1 commands.

Application pack replacement

When an AP or CU is replaced by a compatible pack, the new pack will be provisioned automatically with the current T0 data.

COMDAC replacement

A COMDAC can be replaced by a COMDAC of the same type only (e.g. COM101B can be replaced by a COM101B only). In a configuration provisioned for COMDAC protection, when a COMDAC is replaced, the nonvolatile data memory of the new COMDAC will be updated automatically to match the old pack.

COMDAC migration

COMDACs of different types (COM101 and COM103) cannot be used in a mixed configuration in the same shelf. Therefore, if a migration is desired, it is done out of service by COMDAC removal and replacement.

T0 parameters The T0 data for a logical line defines the service function of the associated subscriber line. The key parameter in the T0 record is the GSFN. The GSFN codes available via the FAST shelf are as shown below.

• DFLT—is primarily applicable to TR-08 applications of the AnyMedia Access System RT. It is the default function code for newly created T0 records*. The DFLT function code is applicable to the POTS, PRCOIN, and PROG2W APs installed in an RT. Subscriber lines that are provisioned with the DFLT function code provide POTS/SPOTS functionality. These lines automatically adapt for loop-start or ground-start services based on the signaling bits received from the COT channel unit or from the TR-08 LDS. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.


363-211-128 Configuration Management—Application PackProvisioningTraditional DLC Interfaces

• DFLT2—is applicable to TR-08 universal applications of the AnyMedia Access System; it is the default function code for newly created T0 records. The DFLT2 function code is applicable to the PRCOINCS AP, which always is located at the COT. Subscriber lines that are provisioned with the DFLT2 function code provide SPOTS functionality. This GSFN code can be used only in COT applications.

• 2LS—is applicable to the POTS, PRCOIN, and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2LS GSFN provide loop-start service. These lines can also be created via TL1 commands. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

• 2GS—is applicable to the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2GS GSFN provide ground-start service. These lines can also be created via TL1 commands. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

• 2FX—is applicable to the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2FX GSFN provide ground-start service and signaling states compatible with PUB43801 for D-type channel banks. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

• 2FXLS—is applicable to the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2FXLS GSFN provide loop-start service and signaling states compatible with PUB43801 for D-type channel banks. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

• 2FXO—is applicable to universal TR-08 or INA VB of the AnyMedia Access System. The 2FXO function code is only compatible with T0 entities provided by COIN_FXO_UC (LPA151), which always is located at the COT. Combinations of this GSFN code and other AP types are reported as a mismatch. Subscriber lines that are provisioned with the 2FXO function code provide POTS/SPOTS or LSAS functionality. This GSFN code can be used only in COT applications.

• 2FXOLS—is applicable to the COIN_FXO_UC (LPA151). Lines that are provisioned with the 2FXOLS GSFN provide loop-start POTS service. The COIN_FXO_UC (LPA151) always is located at the COT. Combinations of this GSFN code and other AP types are alarmed as a mismatch. This GSFN code can be used only in COT applications.

• 2RVO—is applicable to the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2RVO GSFN provide loop reverse battery service with an originating (i.e., CF) interface. Use this GSFN for enhanced 911 trunk (loop reverse battery/DPO end). Lines with this function code can be created via TL1 commands. This GSFN code can be used in both RT and COT applications.

* The default characteristics for new T0 records can be changed with the ED-T0DFLT TL1 command.




• 2NOS—is applicable to the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs. Lines that are provisioned with the 2NOS GSFN provide transmission-only service with sealing current applied to the tip/ring pair. These lines can be created via TL1 commands. This GSFN code can be used in both RT and COT applications.

• COIN—is applicable to lines 1 through 16 of the PRCOIN AP. Lines that are provisioned with the COIN GSFN provide dial-tone-first (loop-start) coin service. These lines can be created only via TL1 commands. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

• COIN2—is applicable to lines 1 through 16 of the PRCOINCS AP or COIN_FXO_UC AP. Lines that are provisioned with the COIN2 GSFN provide dial-tone-first (loop-start) coin CS service. The PRCOINCS AP always is located at the COT. This GSFN can be used only in COT applications.

• 4DO—is not applicable to any AP. This function code conditions a logical line to transport the AnyMedia Access System remote operations channel (ROC). It conditions the logical line to provide a clear 64 kbps digital-compatible channel. This GSFN code can be used in both RT and COT applications.

• 2LO—is applicable to the PRCOINCS AP. Lines that are provisioned with the 2LO GSFN provide loop-start CS service. The PRCOINCS AP always is located at the COT. This GSFN code can be used only in COT applications.

• 2RVT—is applicable to the DPT32CS AP. Lines that are provisioned with the 2RVT GSFN provide loop reverse battery service with a terminate (i.e., current sink) interface. These lines can also be created via TL1 commands. 2RVT is used for locally switched service. This GSFN code can be used only in RT applications.

The mapping of GSFN codes to APs is summarized in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1. Mapping of GSFN Codes to APs and the ROC

COT RTGeneric

Signaling Function

Application Packs Remote Operations

ChannelPOTS PRCOIN PRCOINCS COIN_FXO_UC PROG2W ISDN DPT32CS

✔ DFLT ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ DFLT2 ✔ ✔

✔ 2LS ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ 2GS ✔ ✔

✔ 2FX ✔ ✔

✔ 2FXLS ✔ ✔

✔ 2FXO✔ 2FXOLS✔ ✔ 2RVOa ✔ ✔



Depending on the GSFN code selected for a T0 record, a number of additional parameters can be provisioned for the affected subscriber line. These parameters are summarized in Figure 5-1. Default values are provided for all parameters. The additional parameters are as follows:

• TYPE—is the CLEI code for the AP. This parameter is optional for all lines.

• LOSS—defines the ALC mode for the subscriber circuit. Values are as follows:

— ALC2—This loss mode satisfies the UVG loss requirements of TR-57 for special service CSA loops. The total loop loss is between 2 and 5 dB. This loss mode is preferred by some local exchange carriers for all locally switched services.

— ALC5—This is the recommended loss mode for POTS circuits in the AnyMedia Access System. In conjunction with the loop CF characteristic of the PRCOIN and PROG2W APs, this loss mode approximates the nominal analog access line loudness loss characteristics of ANSI recommendation T1.508.

— AUTO—This loss mode automatically selects between the ALC2 and ALC5 characteristic depending upon the received signaling bits. It is applicable for TR-08 system applications.

— FIXED—This loss mode disables the ALC operation and enables fixed transmit and receive TLPs to be provisioned. When this mode is selected, the RTLP and TTLP parameters must also be provided.

• RTLP (receive transmission level point)—resets a fixed receive gain or loss (i.e., from the DS1 toward the tip/ring pair) in dB. Negative values define loss; positive values define gain.

• TTLP (transmit transmission level point)—sets a fixed transmission gain or loss (i.e., from the tip/ring pair toward the DS1) in dB. Negative values define gain; positive values define loss.

✔ ✔ 2NOS ✔ ✔

✔ COIN ✔b

✔ COIN2 ✔b ✔b

✔ ✔ 4DO ✔

✔ 2LO ✔ ✔

✔ 2RVT ✔

a. Supports enhanced 911 trunk (loop reverse battery/DPO end).b. Coin service is supported on lines 1-16 of the PRCOIN and the PRCOINCS/COIN_FXO-UC APs.

Table 5-1. Mapping of GSFN Codes to APs and the ROC (Continued)

COT RTGeneric

Signaling Function

Application Packs Remote Operations

ChannelPOTS PRCOIN PRCOINCS COIN_FXO_UC PROG2W ISDN DPT32CS




• Z—defines the termination impedance of the tip/ring interface. Values are 600 and 900, which correspond to impedances of 600Ω + 2.16 μF and 900Ω + 2.16 μF, respectively.

• BAL1—determines the hybrid balance characteristic of the AP. When BAL1=AUTO, the AP uses an automatic adaptive hybrid that continuously adjusts to provide near-optimum transhybrid loss. When BAL1=FIXED, a fixed precision balance network must be specified by the BAL2 parameter.

• BAL2—specifies a fixed precision setting for the hybrid balance network. Values for this parameter may be calculated from the procedures in Lucent practice 915-710-116.

• EQLZ1—specifies the frequency equalization of the transmitted signal. A setting of “0” provides flat shaping (i.e., no equalization).

• TC—specifies the Trunk Conditioning behavior of the circuit toward the DS1 during a network or equipment fault. Values are IDLE, BUSY, and RAI. Generally, IDLE is the correct setting for a locally switched circuit, while BUSY may apply for a special service circuit.

• EFTT—enables full-time transmission. This parameter is normally set to “N” to reduce the power consumption of the line interfaces. When set to “N”, the line interface will power-up to provide on-hook transmission during a terminating call to support calling number and calling name identification.

• SST—provides the ability to provision a line for redlined status. When SST=RDLD, restrictions are placed on provisioning changes to the line. Any TL1 messages that affect provisioning of a redlined T0 record must include the flag “CMDMDE=FRCD”. Commands that affect the T0 cross-connections to a redlined line must include the flag “INCL=Y”.



LOSS =[0] | 2.5

TC =[IDLE] |

BUSY | RAI

GSFN =2RVT

.

Figure 5-1. TL1 Provisioning Parameters for T0 Objects—COT/RT FAST Shelf

21610_fig_050b

GSFN =DFLT2,2FXO

GSFN =DFLT

LOSS =ALC2 |ALC5 |[AUTO]

GSFN =2FXLS,

2FX

LOSS =[ALC2] |ALC5 |

FIXED*

(req’d forBAL1 ==FIXED)

GSFN =ISDN

BAL1 =[AUTO] |

FIXED**

TC =[IDLE] |

BUSY | RAI

GSFN =

2LS ,2GS

***

LOSS =[ALC2] |ALC5 |

FIXED*

(req’d forLOSS ==FIXED)

GSFN =2RVO,2NOS

RTLP =-[8] to +1.5

GSFN =COIN

BAL1 =[AUTO] |

FIXED**

TC =[IDLE] |

BUSY | RAI

GSFN =COIN2

GSFN =2LO,

2FXOLS

BAL1 =[AUTO] |

FIXED**

TC =[IDLE] |

BUSY | RAI

Z =600 | [900]***

RTLP =[-8] to +1.5

EQLZ1 =[0] to 7***

EFTT =[Y] | N

Z =600 | [900]

BAL2 =[0] to 15

EQLZ1 =[0] to 7

EFTT =[Y] | N

Z =600 | [900]

EQLZ1 =[0] to 7

EFTT =[Y] | N

TTLP =-6.75 to [+4.5]

TTLP =-6.75 to [+4.5]

TYPE =<CLEI>

SST =[{NULL}] |

RDLD

LEGEND

* ** ***For POTS-only APs,the 2LS provisioning islimited to:

• Z = 900,EQLZ1 = 0•

• If BAL1 equals FIXED andBAL2 does not equal 0,then the AP is taken outof service.

{ }

[ ]

|

- no entry

- default

- or

GSFN =4DO


Configuration Management— Default POTS Line Loss363-211-128


5Configuration Management—Default POTS Line Loss 5

Overview The off-hook transmission loss of POTS lines in universal configurations of the AnyMedia Access System is determined by the per-line provisioning data in the COT and in the RT. By default, the ALC2 automatic loss characteristic of the APs is selected for all POTS and locally switched loop-start and ground-start special service lines. The ALC2 loss characteristic of the APs, in conjunction with CSA loops, meets the overall loss requirements of Telcordia Technologies’ TR-NWT-000057 for UVG services. For loops in excess of 750 ohms DC resistance, the ALC2 characteristic inserts no additional loss so that the overall transmission loss is determined only by the cable loss.

The system’s default setting can be modified to yield other loss characteristics.

Background Any added off-hook transmission loss for POTS and locally switched loop-start and ground-start special service lines in the AnyMedia Access System is inserted by the CF APs that are equipped in the RT for POTS applications. The CS APs, located in the COT, nominally insert no off-hook loss.

The system default provisioning for the RT APs is the “DFLT” generic signaling function and the “AUTO” loss setting. The AUTO loss setting configures the APs to automatically adjust their off-hook loss characteristic in response to the received ABCD signaling-bit code for each subscriber line. Unique idle signaling-bit codes are defined by Telcordia Technologies’ TR-TSY-000008 for single party (POTS) service and for locally switched special (UVG) services. The differing signaling-bit codes allow the RT APs to automatically detect the service type for each line and to insert the appropriate off-hook loss. When the APs receive the POTS idle signaling-bit code, they insert the ALC5 loss characteristic. When they receive the UVG idle signaling-bit code, they insert the ALC2 loss characteristic.

The system default provisioning for the COT APs is the “DFLT2” or “2FXO” generic signaling function. This configures the COT APs to transmit the UVG idle signaling-bit code toward the RT.

With the stated default provisioning for both the COT and RT terminals, all POTS and locally switched loop-start and ground-start special service lines will be conditioned for the ALC2 loss characteristic. The system default loss setting can be changed by either of the following:

• Modify the COT per-line provisioning, so that the POTS idle code is transmitted to the RT APs. This will cause the affected lines to automatically insert the ALC5 loss characteristic.

• Modify the RT per-line provisioning to override the AUTO loss setting.


363-211-128 Configuration Management— Default POTS LineLossTraditional DLC Interfaces

For most applications, the default system loss settings should be used. Although the loss settings can be changed by system provisioning, an engineering decision should be made to evaluate the cost and complexity of administering the per-line option selections that may be required.

Changing the default system loss

Selecting the system loss via COT line provisioning 5

Each COT line can be provisioned to transmit either the POTS idle signaling-bit code or the UVG idle signaling-bit code. When the system is initially provisioned via the ED-VEQPT TL1 command, the default per-line provisioning is the “DFLT2” or “2FXO” generic signaling function and, consequently, the UVG idle signaling-bit code. With this code applied to all lines, no per-line provisioning activities are needed to administer POTS and locally switched special services in the system. These services can be routinely assigned and activated, as long as the appropriate APs are equipped in the system and CSA loop requirements are met for the special service lines.

The default system loss for all lines can be changed only at system initialization, before per-line provisioning data has been written into the AnyMedia Access System’s NVDS. To change the default setting of the COT lines to transmit the POTS idle signaling-bit code (and therefore to activate the ALC5 POTS loss characteristic in the RT), the T0DFLT data record should be edited via the ED-T0DFLT TL1 command. Then, the ED-VEQPT TL1 command should be executed to store the new T0DFLT data record in the system’s NVDS for all lines. To select the POTS idle signaling-bit code for all lines, the T0DFLT data record should be edited as follows:

GSFN=2LO or (generic signaling function is two-wire loop start)GSFN=2FXOLS (generic signaling function is two-wire FX office loop

start).

If the default loss for all system lines is set to the ALC5 loss characteristic, then individual per-line provisioning will be needed for locally switched loop-start and ground-start special circuits (i.e., these services cannot be assigned for service without a system provisioning activity). This is because the ALC5 loss characteristic can exceed the maximum loss requirement for UVG services, per TR-NWT-000057. If per-line provisioning is necessary, locally switched loop-start and ground-start special services should be individually provisioned in the COT to select GSFN=DFLT2 or GSFN=2FXO using the ED-T0 TL1 command. This provisioning activity can be performed manually via the CIT or TL1SI.

Selecting the system loss via RT line provisioning 5

Each RT line on a POTS, PROG2W, or PRCOIN AP can be provisioned to insert a specific off-hook loss characteristic on each line regardless of the received ABCD idle signaling-bit code. When the system is initially provisioned via the ED-VEQPT TL1 command, the default per-line provisioning is:


Configuration Management— Default POTS Line Loss363-211-128


GSFN=DFLT (generic signaling function is two-wire loop start).LOSS=AUTO (off-hook loss automatically set by received ABCD bits).EFTT=Y (full-time transmission is enabled).

Two options are available for changing the system loss via RT provisioning:

1. The LOSS parameter can be set to “ALC2” or “ALC5” on individual RT lines (via the ED-T0 TL1 command) or for all RT lines (via the ED-T0DFLT and ED-VEQPT TL1 commands). The default setting for all lines can be changed only at system initialization, before per-line provisioning data has been written into the AnyMedia Access System’s NVDS.

2. The GSFN parameter can be changed to “2LS” or “2GS” to provide a wider range of LOSS options. With the 2LS and 2GS generic signaling functions, the LOSS parameter can be selected as “ALC2”, “ALC5”, or “FIXED”. If the LOSS=FIXED option is selected, the transmit and receive loss for each line can be set independently over a wide range. This change can be applied on individual RT lines, or to all RT lines. Again, changes to all lines must be made during system initialization.

An engineering evaluation should be performed prior to changing the system default loss values. If the default per-line provisioning is changed to ALC5 or FIXED loss at the RT, then the system’s lines may not be assignable for locally switched loop-start and ground-start special services without a provisioning activity (i.e., individual per-line provisioning may be needed for these services). The ALC5 loss characteristic can exceed the maximum loss requirement for UVG services, per TR-NWT-000057. FIXED loss settings may, or may not, satisfy the loss requirements for a specific service. If per-line provisioning is necessary, locally switched loop-start and ground-start special services can be individually provisioned in the RT using the ED-T0 TL1 command to select GSFN=DFLT and LOSS=ALC2. This provisioning activity can be performed manually via the CIT or TL1SI.


363-211-128 Configuration Management— SynchronizationProvisioningTraditional DLC Interfaces

5Configuration Management—Synchronization Provisioning 5

Overview Synchronization provisioning controls the synchronization mode of the AnyMedia Access System and its synchronization reference sources.

Synchronization modes

The synchronization mode is selected by a TL1 command.

The AnyMedia Access System COT typically operates in the externally timed mode, where it is synchronized to external clock signals from a building timing supply (a BITS clock) or from a SONET multiplexer. The system accepts either DS1 (1.544 MHz) or composite clock (64/8 kHz) external clock signals. External clock signal inputs must be duplicated. The AnyMedia Access System automatically switches to the duplicate clock signal if the active signal fails.

The AnyMedia Access System can operate in the line-timed mode, where synchronization is obtained from selected DS1 input signals. This mode is usually applicable to RTs, which derive their timing from their host COT or digital switch (for integrated system configurations).

The system can also operate in the free-running mode. It will automatically operate in the free-running mode if both external synchronization inputs fail (in the externally timed mode) or if both feeder DS1 synchronization inputs fail (in the line-timed mode).

Synchronization for universal systems

Synchronization configurations for universal AnyMedia Access Systems are illustrated in Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2, and Figure 5-3. The preferred configuration is determined by the feeder facility. Note that the figures show only one synchronization signal for clarity; all external synchronization inputs to the AnyMedia Access System must be duplicated.

Externally timed/line timed configuration A 5

The externally timed/line-timed configuration shown in Figure 5-1 on page 5-26 is the preferred arrangement when the COT-RT DS1 feeder signals are transported by metallic T1 facilities or by an asynchronous optical multiplex system. In this configuration, the COT FAST shelf is externally timed to the central office’s integrated timing supply. The COT external synchronization input may be either a 64/8 kHz office composite clock or a DS1 clock. In this configuration, the RT FAST


Configuration Management— Synchronization Provisioning


shelf is line-timed to the feeder DS1 signals from its host COT. The synchronization provisioning for this configuration is as follows:

Figure 5-1. Externally Timed/Line Timed Configuration A

Figure 5-2. Externally Timed/Line Timed Configuration B

AnyMedia Access System Terminal

Synchronization Provisioning

COTSYNCNMODE=EXT64orSYNCNMODE=EXT1544

RT SYNCNMODE=LPD


363-211-128 Configuration Management— SynchronizationProvisioningTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 5-3. Externally Timed/Externally Timed Configuration

Externally timed/line timed configuration B 5

Externally timed/line timed configuration (Figure 5-2) is the recommended arrangement for systems with SONET optical transport facilities. Although the figure illustrates a point-to-point SONET subnetwork, the transport facilities may be nodes in a much larger SONET ring. In this configuration, both the COT FAST shelf and the SONET subnetwork are externally synchronized to integrated timing supplies*. The COT’s external synchronization input may be either a 64/8 kHz office composite clock or a DS1 clock. The SONET multiplexer at the RT site derives timing from the incoming electrical DS1 and delivers a highly reliable DS1 clock output to the RT FAST shelf. The synchronization provisioning for this configuration is as follows:

* The SONET subnetwork may be synchronized to the same timing supply system as the COT FAST shelf, or the SONET subnetwork may by synchronized to a distant supply as long as both timing supplies share traceability to a PRS.

AnyMedia Access System Terminal Synchronization Provisioning


RT SYNCNMODE=LPD


Configuration Management— Synchronization Provisioning


Externally timed/externally timed 5

The externally timed/externally timed configuration shown in Table 5-3 is the alternative arrangement for systems with SONET optical transport facilities. Although the figure illustrates a point-to-point SONET subnetwork, the transport facilities may be nodes in a much larger SONET ring. In this configuration, both the COT FAST shelf and the SONET subnetwork are externally synchronized to integrated timing supplies*. The COT’s external synchronization input may be either a 64/8 kHz office composite clock or a DS1 clock. The SONET multiplexer at the RT site derives timing from the incoming optical line and delivers a highly reliable DS1 clock output to the RT FAST shelf. The synchronization provisioning for this configuration is as follows:

* The SONET subnetwork may be synchronized to the same timing supply system as the COT FAST shelf, or the SONET subnetwork may by synchronized to a distant supply as long as both timing supplies share traceability to a PRS.

AnyMedia Access System Terminal

Synchronization Provisioning


RT SYNCNMODE=EXT1544



363-211-128Fault ManagementTraditional DLC Interfaces

5Fault Management 5

Overview Fault Management is the system activity for the following operations:

• Maintenance—automatic and manual activities to ensure continued operation and minimize service degradation

• Alarms and events—equipment and facility monitoring that results in alarms, status condition reports, and transient condition reports

• Protection switching—automatic recovery mechanisms when a fault is detected in the system

• Testing—turn-up tests, loopbacks, self-tests, and on-demand circuit testing.

Fault Management—Maintenance363-211-128


5Fault Management—Maintenance 5

Overview Maintenance is the set of activities performed automatically and/or manually to ensure continued operation and to minimize service degradation. This section addresses the following:

• Maintenance objectives

• Maintenance concepts of detection, isolation, reporting, and recovery

• Proactive maintenance.

Maintenance objectives

Accurate maintenance can be performed on a system that has been properly installed and provisioned.

Maintenance provides the tools that fulfill the following objectives:

• Detect the majority of all faults in the system

• Isolate faults accurately to avoid false dispatching

• Report faults as soon as the faults occur with sufficient supporting information

• Recover from faults via automatic protection actions to minimize service degradation and/or field dispatch

• Support proactive maintenance to discover faults before the faults can affect service.

Detection Detection is the act of determining that a problem exists in the system. A problem can be either permanent or transient in nature. In the system, the detection of these kinds of problems is accomplished in two ways:

1. The first and most prevalent way to detect a problem is unit fault detection. Unit fault detection has been designed into most replaceable units in the system and allows the unit to determine its own health, determine the quality of its inputs, and report any malfunctions. Unit fault detection is used mostly for permanent faults, which are reported as alarms. See the Fault Management—Alarms and Events section for details.

2. The second way to detect a problem is Performance Management. Performance Management monitors the quality of the communications (bit-error-rate, protocol violations, etc.) between system elements. Some transient conditions are immediately reported as events, and some are accumulated until the conditions exceed a predetermined threshold, when a TCA is reported. See the Performance Management section for details.


363-211-128Fault Management—MaintenanceTraditional DLC Interfaces

Both methods of fault detection are used throughout the system to ensure complete system coverage. Both methods are done continuously and do not interrupt service or limit the ability to provide service.

Isolation Isolation is the process of analyzing the system alarms, TCAs, events, etc., that have been detected and reported to determine the root cause of the detected conditions in the system.

The goal is to isolate the fault to a replaceable unit. In most cases, the exact location and replaceable unit are known at the time when the fault is detected. Sometimes additional analysis is needed when a detected event is transient or manifests itself with other sympathetic conditions (e.g., the removal of an AP causes the loss of communications [sympathetic condition] between the COMDAC and the AP).

The isolation of transient errors such as TCAs requires an external OS to perform analysis of additional data.

Reporting Reporting is the process of communicating the detected system faults to a central location for field dispatch or further analysis. All system alarms and events are reported across the OS and GSI/TL1SI interfaces via autonomous TL1 messages. Alarms also can be reported over the TR-08 DS1-A data link. Most system faults are reported autonomously as the faults occur. Some system faults are discovered and reported during routine system operation and surveillance. Most single faults are reported within a few seconds after the faults have been detected.

Some preprocessing of data is done during the reporting phase. Time stamps are added to the message (message-based interfaces) to help correlate other events and alarms. Alarms are classified by severity to help determine urgency. (Alarm severity is user provisionable.) The system can be instructed via an external request to enter into an alarm-inhibiting mode in which autonomous alarm messages for all system entities are prevented from being transmitted to the OS, TL1SI, or GSI interface. The system can be instructed via an external request to resume autonomous alarm reporting to a specific operations/user interface. Autonomous alarm message inhibiting and resuming features are useful to handle special maintenance, service activation, or system reconfiguration situations.

The AnyMedia Access System provides the capability to send alarms to Telcordia’s NMA system in the UCC to provide alarm reporting, alarm processing, and trouble dispatch.

In addition to alarm and event reporting, local LED indicators on the equipment faceplate indicate equipment faults or status conditions.


Fault Management—Maintenance363-211-128


The system also supports CO/remote alarm closures (located on the CTU and the ATU) indicating the system level alarms.

Recovery Recovery is the action taken to prevent a detected fault from continuing to affect service. Hardware fault recovery mechanisms include either or both of the following:

• The automatic protection action taken to minimize service degradation (e.g., stable calls)

• Manual service recovery (i.e., a field dispatch).

When the system detects a pack fault or pack removal condition, it performs a protection switch if the implicated pack is protected. If the pack is not protected, the system attempts to recover the failed circuit pack with a hard reset of the implicated pack.

The system also automatically initiates its recovery when power is restored. The system returns all services to the state prior to power loss within a few minutes after the return of valid and stable power.

Proactive maintenance

Proactive maintenance is the ability to predict or discover a system failure before it becomes service-affecting. The system entities that are involved in carrying service to a large number of subscribers are protected with redundant units. Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the system when a fault is detected.

The system also provides the capability to allow periodic maintenance activity to monitor the integrity of transmission paths. These maintenance activities include operations such as performing channel/drop tests, DS1 loopbacks, and manual switch protection. These maintenance activities can be initiated via TL1 commands over the OS or TL1SI/GSI interface or through a loop testing system in the case of PGTC-compatible channel and RT drop testing.


363-211-128Fault Management—Alarms and EventsTraditional DLC Interfaces

5Fault Management—Alarms and Events 5

Overview The surveillance capabilities of the system consist of equipment and facility monitoring. During normal operation, the system provides continuous or periodic surveillance through the following noninvasive diagnostics:

• Active and/or standby units

• DS1 signal inputs

• Equipment power

• Environmental conditions.

The results of these monitoring activities generate alarms and status condition and/or transient condition reports.

The AnyMedia Access System provides the following capabilities:

• Classification of detected alarms

• Reporting and retrieving alarms

• CO/remote alarm output closures and cutoff

• Inhibiting and resuming alarms

• Provisioning of alarm severity levels.

Alarm classifications

Detected alarms are classified as one of the following:

• Equipment alarm types

• Facility alarms

• Timing signal alarms

• Synchronization alarms

• Environmental alarms.

Equipment alarms 5

Equipment alarms include the following fault conditions:

• Circuit pack faults, missing or incompatible

• Peripheral pack(s) not responding to poll

• Data link faults

• Input power failure

• System memory faults

• Failure to update system data and programs.


Fault Management—Alarms and Events363-211-128


Facility alarms 5

Facility alarms indicate DS1 feeder and INA facilities problems. These alarms indicate faulty conditions in the incoming TR-08 or INA DS1 signals, including the following:

• Loss of frame

• Loss of signal

• High BER

• AIS

• DS1 yellow received

Timing signal alarm 5

The system uses the following external criteria to determine if a line timing signal has failed:

• LOS

• LOF

• AIS

• High BER (10 consecutive severely errored seconds [SESs])

The system uses the following external criteria to determine if an external DS1 timing signal has failed:

• LOS

• LOF

• AIS

The system uses the following external criteria to determine if an external composite office clock signal has failed:

• LOS

Synchronization alarms 5

The AnyMedia Access System shelf will report alarms for any failures of in-service DS1 feeders. An additional alarm will be raised when the failed DS1 feeder is a provisioned timing input. If the system is free-running due to timing input failure(s), the free-running condition will also be alarmed.

Network synchronization problems can be detected by collecting CSS counts and TCAs for the DS1 feeders. If all DS1 feeder signals are not synchronous, timing slips may occur, but the frequency offset may not produce a hard failure condition and thus no alarms may be raised. The presence of CSS counts will reveal this condition.



Environmental alarms 5

Environmental alarms represent failure or status conditions external to the COT FAST shelf, which can include power failure, fan failure, fuse failure, and a variety of status conditions, such as tamper (open door) or battery-on-discharge.

Some local (CO) environmental alarms (e.g., ringing) are hard wired to detection circuitry on the FAST shelf. Other local environmental alarms (e.g., fan, fuse alarm) must be physically wired to one of the 8 miscellaneous contact closures on the CTU.

Remote environmental alarms from the RT can also be activated via the power minor/miscellaneous bit on an incoming TR-08 data link. In addition to any physical wiring that may be required, the alarm type (e.g. fan, fuse, tamper, etc.) must be provisioned in the COT FAST shelf for each environmental alarm that is activated by either a miscellaneous contact closure or the TR-08 data link.

The UC configuration supports remote environmental alarms so that each UC VRT can send up to 20 bits via a dedicated bit field to the UC VCOT.

The COT FAST shelf supports 9 pre-defined environmental alarm types and 8 user-defined environmental alarm types. The user may assign character strings to the contact closures that indicate these environmental alarms.

The 9 pre-defined alarm types include the following:

• AC input power failure

• Battery-on-discharge

• Power minor (ringing generator backup failed, rectifier/converter backup failed, loss of AC power, and/or thermal probe failed)

• Power major (unprotected ringing generator failed, unprotectedrectifier/converter failed, and/or excessive battery temperature)

• Fuse minor (fuse failed with backup)

• Fuse major (fuse failed without backup)

• Fan failed

• Tamper (enclosure door open)

• –48V power feed (for J1C282AB-1 and J1C282AC-1 shelves when alarm input is connected).

Note that any or all of these alarm types may be defined at both the COT and RT FAST shelves. In most system, the tamper, AC failure and battery-on-discharge alarm types will pertain mainly to the RT FAST shelf, whereas the fan and fuse alarm types will apply equally to both the COT and RT FAST shelves.

Careful planning, assignment and coordination is important to ensure that there is no ambiguity in the interpretation of environmental alarms. This is especially true when the COT FAST shelf is connected to multiple RT FAST shelves located at




different remote sites. The following recommendations apply to environmental alarm assignments:

• Assignment of alarm types at one end of an AnyMedia Access System (e.g., COT) should be consistent with assignments at the other (e.g., RT). For example, if the “tamper” alarm is assigned to the miscellaneous bit on vrt1 at the RT FAST shelf, the COT FAST shelf should also have the “tamper” alarm type associated with the incoming miscellaneous bit on vrt1.

• In case of overlap in the alarm types, the user-definable alarm types can be employed to uniquely identify the location of the alarm (e.g., COT_FAN alarm).

• Avoid overlap of alarm types by limiting the number of alarms sent over the data link from the RT FAST shelf to the COT FAST shelf to an essential set of summary alarms.

Reporting and retrieving alarms

Alarm, status condition, and/or transient condition information is reported by the system over the following interfaces.

• OS or TL1SI/GSI interfaces

• DS1 data link interfaces

• Visual indicators.

OS or TL1/GSI interfaces 5

The TL1 interface transmits autonomous messages for individual and summary alarms, status condition reports, and transient condition reports. This interface also supports OS or GSI/TL1SI query for alarms and status conditions. The functions supported over the TL1 interface include the following:

• Reporting equipment and facility alarms

• Reporting environmental alarms

• Reporting status and transient conditions, including TCAs

• Retrieving currently active equipment and facility alarms

• Retrieving currently active environmental alarms

• Retrieving currently active status conditions

• Retrieving alarm/status history report.

COT and INA DS1 interfaces 5

TR-08 alarms from the AnyMedia RT are made available to the COT over the DS1-A data link. In addition, DS1 maintenance signals are reported over the DS1s, including INA DS1s. All alarms and events are TR-08 compliant. Alarms on the TR-08 data link generate autonomous TL1 messages at the COT, in addition to those generated by the RT.



COT and Universal Concentrator (UC) interfaces 5

In the AnyMedia UC, the connection control is performed via message exchange on the UC control link between the COT and RT. The COT serves as the connection “master” by selecting the DS1/DS0 combination to be used for a particular connection. For its part, the RT informs the COT of subscriber loop activity (on/off-hook) and makes (or breaks) the connections as specified by the COT. The UC software monitors the state of the UC control link and raises an alarm if it is not operational. In this way, the UC mismatches will be alarmed.

Visual indicators 5• LEDs on the faceplates of all packs in the system reflect fault conditions of

the circuit pack.

• A single shelf LED on the FAST shelf provides a visible summary alarm indication inclusive that the FAST shelf doors aren’t closed.

CO local alarm output closures

The system provides two sets of local (CO) alarm output closures:

• One set for visual alarm indications

• One set for audible alarm indications

Each set of alarm closures is used to indicate the most severe alarm state (critical, major, minor) in the system, which includes equipment, facility, and environmental alarms.

COT remote alarm output closures

The system provides a set of alarm closures for output to the remote telemetry system to indicate the most severe alarm state (critical, major, minor) in the system. In addition, miscellaneous alarm closures are provided for sending environmental alarms over the remote telemetry system.

Alarm cutoff (ACO) The system supports the alarm cutoff function that retires the audible local and remote output closures when activated.




Inhibiting/resuming alarm

The system provides the capability to inhibit and resume autonomous alarm reporting to any telephony OAM&P interfaces.

It is possible to disable all alarms of one (or more) specific entity or of an entity group. The ability to disable alarms can be useful for example during troubleshooting to avoid a great amount of alarm reports.

Provisioning of alarm severity level

The system provides the capability to provision the alarm severity level for individual alarms.


363-211-128Fault Management—Protection SwitchingTraditional DLC Interfaces

5G40Fault Management—Protection Switching 5

Overview Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism when a fault is detected in the system.

Protection switching is based on the following principles:

• Redundancy of components where components are protected either 1:1 or 1:N

• Revertive or nonrevertive switching to protected components.

Redundant components

For 1:1 protected components, one component serves as the active or primary component. The other component serves as a protection or standby component. For 1:N protected components, one component is capable of serving as the protection or standby component for all N active components (where 1 ≤N ≤5). If an active component fails, the failure is detected, and service is automatically protection switched to the protection component.

Revertive versus nonrevertive

In the AnyMedia Access System, protection of some components is revertive, while protection of other components is nonrevertive. Revertive protection switching implies that the active and standby components return to their original configuration once the failure causing the protection switch has been repaired. Nonrevertive switching implies the components do not return to their original configuration. In nonrevertive switching, the repaired component becomes the new standby component.

Componentsprotected

Protection switching is provided for the following components:

• COMDAC packs (for duplex operation)—automatic/manual (nonrevertive)

• IODS1 packs (for protected IODS1 operation)—automatic/manual (revertive)

• Synchronization reference sources—automatic/manual (nonrevertive).

COMDAC protection 5

The COMDAC provides the core functions, including bandwidth management and time-slot interchange function.

The system supports both duplex and simplex operations modes. Both active and standby units are continuously monitored.


Fault Management—Protection Switching363-211-128


Duplex operations mode supports the following:

• Scheduled or manual side switching is hitless

• Stable calls are preserved during automatic side switching during the following:

— Software download— Hardware faults.

IODS1 pack protection 5

The IODS1s provide the interface to the COMDAC for the DS1 links from the COT. Calls are protected during IODS1 protection switching.

The system supports both protected and unprotected IODS1 configurations (i.e., up to five operational packs plus one spare can be optionally installed). IODS1 packs are protected by the IODS1 in the protection slot provided that the pack population is in consecutively numbered slots beginning with slot 1. In a universal configuration, IODS1 pack protection at one end has no effect on the other shelf (COT/RT). Gaps in slot population will cause all packs in slot numbers higher than the gap slot to be unprotected. Both active and standby components are continuously monitored. A maximum of five active packs provides 20 DS1s and can be protected by one IODS1 protection pack.

Synchronization source protection 5

The COT is synchronized to an external signal. The external signal is selected by provisioning. The source may be a service DS1 BITS clock, or a composite clock. The system supports the provisioning of one protection synchronization source as a secondary source. Both active and standby components are continuously monitored. The protection switch is automatically initiated upon detection of faults of the active synchronization source or on demand.

Protection switch characteristics per component

Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 list how each protected component in the system is protected, the component’s protection switching behavior, and whether or not the component can be switched on demand.

Table 5-1. COMDAC Packs Protect

COMDAC Protection Detected Fault protect switch

Nonrevertive switch

Switch on Demanda

a. Routine side switching capability is provided.

Core 1:1(optional)

Yes Yes Yes


363-211-128Fault Management—Protection SwitchingTraditional DLC Interfaces

Table 5-2. IODS1 Packs Protect

IODS1 Pack Protection Detected Fault protect switch

Nonrevertive switch

Switch on Demand

IODS1 1:N(1 ≤ N ≤ 5)(optional)

Yes No Yes

Table 5-3. Synchronization Sources Protect

Synch Source Protection Detected Fault protect switch

Nonrevertive switch

Switch on Demand

DS1 BITS clock or composite clock

1:1(required)

Yes Yes Yes


Fault Management—Testing363-211-128


5Fault Management—Testing 5

Overview The COT supports a variety of tests for services, including the following:

• Turn-up tests

• Loopbacks

• Self-tests

• On-demand circuit testing.

Standard external TR-465 (PGTC)-compatible locally switched service circuit testing operations systems (such as the Tollgrade LoopCare system) are supported at the COT for universal TR-08 configurations.

Turn-up tests The COT provides automatic circuit pack diagnostic tests as part of the turn-up process, which include built-in self-test.

Loopbacks The COT allows loopbacks of DS1 feeders for turn-up and maintenance testing of traditional DLC services. A TR-08 COT can request a FELP over the TR-08 data link. This requires sending an OPR-LPBK TL1 command over the UCC.

NOTE:The system does not allow an OPR-LPBK sent over UCC to loop back the DS1 carrying the ROC/UCC channel.

Self-tests The COT supports extensive self-tests that are independent of any external connections. When installed, each circuit pack and AP designed for the AnyMedia Access System performs a self-test. If the self-test fails, the appropriate alarm is reported, and the fault LED is lit on the pack.


363-211-128Fault Management—TestingTraditional DLC Interfaces

On-demand circuit testing capabilities

The system provides the following on-demand circuit testing capabilities for VF lines:

• Local metallic test access for both locally switched and special service circuits

• On-demand AP diagnosis

• TR-465 compatible PGTC channel and RT drop testing of locally switched services using an external TOS, such as the Tollgrade LoopCare system.

Local test access 5

Local test access is available from jacks on the CTU faceplate (or the test points on the MDS2, if an MDS2 is used at the COT). The type of access available (none, bridging, half split, or full split) depends on the test access relays (if any) that are installed on the AP or CU to be tested. For example, the LPA150 only supports bridging access, while the LPA350 and LPA380 support full-splitting metallic access.

AP diagnosis 5

The local or remote TL1SI or GSI/TL1SI view interface or the OS interface can be used to request diagnosis of either an entire AP or a particular subscriber line on this pack.

! CAUTION:Diagnosis of an AP is service-affecting to the circuit or circuits being tested.

TR-465 compatible PGTC channel and RT drop testing 5

See Chapter 6, COT Testing on page 6-58 and AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG), Chapter 8 OAM&P for Traditional DLC Services, for illustrations and explanations of the various possible TR-465–compatible testing configurations for universal AnyMedia Access Systems.


Performance Management363-211-128


5Performance Management 5

Overview Performance Management is the system activity for collecting and reporting data on the quality of transmission on the feeder (TR-08, and INA) DS1s and ISDN lines. Performance Management operation includes data collection, specification of thresholds for TCAs, generation of TCAs, and reports of Performance Management data.

DS1 (TR-08 and INA) Performance Management operation

For TR-08 and INA DS1 Performance Management, the system continuously collects Performance Management data internally, and an external system can retrieve this data on a 15-minute or 24-hour basis. DS1 Performance Management aligns with the recommendations in Telcordia Technologies, Inc. GR-820 for DS1 path monitoring.

Performance Management data

Performance Management data are collected for the following:

• Coding violation-path (CV-P)

• Severely errored framing second-path (SEFS-P)

• Controlled slip second-path (CSS-P)

• Errored second-line (ES-L)

• Errored second-path (ES-P)

• Severely errored second-path (SES-P)

• Unavailable second-path (UAS-P).

Data are collected in 15-minute intervals. For each category, current and previous 15-minute Performance Management counts are stored. In addition, for all except CV-P, 31 history counts are stored for a total of eight hours of data. All counts can be retrieved from the TL1 interface to an OS or from a TL1SI or GSI/TL1SI view interface.

Once a Performance Management count exceeds the threshold, an autonomous message is generated to indicate a TCA. The threshold values can be set externally for the individual Performance Management counts. TCA messages can be inhibited.

Performance Management capabilities

Performance Management has general capabilities for DS1 via TL1 commands as follows:

• Retrieve Performance Management information

• Set and retrieve the threshold values for TCA generation


363-211-128Performance ManagementTraditional DLC Interfaces

• Reset the Performance Management counts

• Report the occurrence of a TCA

• Allow/inhibit the TCA reporting.


Performance Management363-211-128




System Planning and Engineering For Traditional DLC Services 6

Overview 6

This System Planning and Engineering chapter provides the information necessary to plan and engineer the traditional DLC applications of the AnyMedia Access System.

Page

System Capacity 6-2Growth Scenarios 6-6Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INA Telephony Configurations 6-10

System Installation Planning 6-13Engineering the LAN Connection 6-14Default System Parameter Provisioning Selection 6-28COT Alarm Engineering 6-35DS1 Feeders 6-44Synchronization and Timing 6-47Management Interface PC Requirements 6-50Product Reliability 6-52COT FAST Shelf Powering 6-53COT Testing 6-58Engineering Work Order 6-686-68

6-586-536-526-506-476-446-356-286-146-13

6-10

6-66-2

March 2007 6-1

System Capacity363-211-128


63System Capacity 6

Overview This section describes the system capacity of the AnyMedia Access System for traditional DLC interfaces.

Description Telephony services include all services that can be provided by a single 64 kbps DS0 channel as well as 2B+D ISDN circuits. Figure 6-1 shows the physical layout of the standard COT FAST shelf, where the common unit circuit packs are located on the left-hand side of the shelf and the specific APs are located on the right-hand side of the shelf.

Maximum number of logical VCOTs and VBs per AnyMedia FAST shelf

The software allows the AnyMedia FAST shelf to be logically divided into a number of independent VCOTs and VBs that provide the different traditional DLC interfaces. The number of VCOTs and VBs can be adapted to suit each individual application as long as the total number of DS1s does not exceed 20. The following types of logical VCOTs and VBs are available to provide traditional DLC telephony service interfaces:

• Up to 20 Mode 1 TR-08 VCOTs (single DS1)

• Up to 5 Mode 1 TR-08 VCOTs (4 DS1s)

• Up to 20 INA VBs

• Up to 5 UC VCOTs.

The number of VCOTs and VBs required in a particular AnyMedia COT FAST shelf will depend on the application.

Any service (POTS or special service) can be carried over a VCOT or an INA VB. A VCOT will require a corresponding TR08 VRT having the same number of DS1 lines at the AnyMedia RT shelf. An INA VB will require a corresponding INA VB at the remote terminal end. All other considerations being equal, it is inherently advantageous to assign as many lines as possible to TR08 (VCOT/VRT) facilities, instead of INA VB facilities because the TR08 data link provides alarm capabilities. For example, each TR-08 data link can transport major, minor and miscellaneous alarms from the RT to the COT, whereas the INA VB does not have this capability.

There are, however, specific situations for which it can be advantageous to carry certain types of services, such as non-locally switched services, over an INA VB. For example, the INA VB might be used to facilitate grooming of special services by using a digital access cross-connect (DACS) between the VCOT and the VRT.

The INA VB could also be used to separate switched services from non-switched special services. Separation of such services could help facilitate a future


363-211-128System CapacityTraditional DLC Interfaces

conversion from a universal configuration to an integrated configuration in which it is desirable to route only switched services to a local digital switch.

Maximum number of DS1 feeders per AnyMedia FAST shelf

As shown in the left-hand side of Figure 6-1, the AnyMedia FAST shelf has a maximum capacity of 6 IODS1 slot positions. There are 4 individual DS1s per IODS1, which represent a total of 24 (6 x 4 = 24) DS1 feeder circuits. One of these IODS1s serves only for protection; therefore, the maximum DS1 capacity by the five active IODS1 circuit packs is 20 DS1 ports available to the VCOTs and VBs defined for that shelf. Each DS1 is capable of supporting 24 channels; therefore, the feeder capacity has a maximum of 480 (20 x 24 = 480) channels.

Figure 6-1. FAST Shelf Physical Layout

Line capacity The maximum number of lines per AnyMedia FAST shelf are as follows:

• For a standard AnyMedia Access System COT FAST shelf—480 if 15 AP slots are equipped and all the AP packs are PRCOIN, PRCOINCS, or PROG2W

• For mixtures of POTS and coin lines—up to a total of 256 coin lines and 480 total lines.

TR-08 VCOT capacity

A FAST shelf supports up to 20 individual Mode 1 TR-08 VCOTs at the same time. Each of these VCOTs has the following:


System Capacity363-211-128


• Up to a maximum 96 active logical lines, if all four DS1s per VCOT (designated A, B, C, and D) are provisioned.

• A maximum capacity of the AnyMedia COT is limited to 480 (20 DS1s x 24 channels/DS1 = 480 channels).

• Up to four active logical feeder DS1s (designated A, B, C, D).

• A bit-oriented data link in the framing bit position of the “A” DS1 feeder that carries alarm messages and channel and RT drop testing messages.

• Processing and hardware to initiate and respond to data link messages and robbed bit signaling as defined in the Telcordia Technologies, Inc. TR-08 specification.

Since there is no concentration in Mode 1 TR-08, there is a fixed relationship between TR-08 logical feeder timeslots and TR-08 logical line numbers as follows:

• Channels 1 - 24 digroup A

• Channels 25 - 48 digroup B

• Channels 49 - 72 digroup C

• Channels 73 - 96 digroup D

However, it is possible to associate lines as follows:

• Any physical DS1 feeder port with any TR-08 logical feeder DS1 by sending a T1 cross-connection message over the operations interface

• Any physical line on any AP with any TR-08 logical line by sending a T0 cross-connection message over the operations interface.

The AnyMedia Access System allows up to 20 TR-08 VCOTs, and these VCOTs can use any of the 20 feeder DS1 ports available in a shelf. The actual number of TR-08 VCOTs that can be supported by a given shelf depends on the line sizes of the VCOTs and the availability of feeder DS1 ports, which can vary depending on the configuration of VCOTs and VBs provisioned on the shelf. The subtending RT FAST shelf should be provisioned to be compatible with the COT FAST shelf provisioning.

INA VB A single INA VB can provide up to 24 special services circuits over 1 DS1 feeder. Because the services supported by INA non-switched and non-locally switched special services can also be supported by TR-08 interfaces, INA VBs should be limited to supporting D4 banks at customer locations. Though it is unlikely to be required, up to 20 INA VBs can be provided by an AnyMedia COT system.


363-211-128System CapacityTraditional DLC Interfaces

AnyMedia UC capacity

When the RT and COT FAST shelves are using a UC VCOT/VRT interface, the number of lines the shelves can provide is limited to 512 lines of service due to analog loops at the COT shelf. Each single UC virtual central office terminal ( UC VCOT) can use up to 20 DS1s for supporting up to 512 loops to the local switch. Each DS1 carries 24 DS0s.

The capacity of the AnyMedia UC VCOT/VRT configuration is as follows:

• Number of supported lines: Up to 512 (plus one ROC)

• Number of supported DS1s per UC VCOT: 1-20 (maximum number of DS1s for all 5 UC VCOTs per shelf is also 20)

• Max. number of DS0s for a UC VRT (maximum number of simultaneous calls) at

- one DS1: 22 (24 DS0s minus one UC data link and one ROC)

- two or more DS1s: n x 24 minus 3 (n x 24 DS0s minus one primary UC data link, one secondary UC data link, and one ROC)

Note: One DS0 is reserved in the AnyMedia UC for a ROC, even if ROC T0 not cross-connected to a UC VRT.

• Number of UC VCOTs per COT Shelf: Up to 5

• Number of UC VRTs per RT Shelf: 1


Growth Scenarios363-211-128


6Growth Scenarios 6

Overview This section defines system and pack growth and degrowth. Sample scenarios demonstrate the methods for performing different growth and degrowth situations.

System growth System growth is defined as the installation and turn-up of either feeder and/or distribution capacity to an existing operational AnyMedia Access System. Additional feeder capacity may be needed for adding services to existing VCOTs, adding new VCOTs to an existing AnyMedia Access System, or adding an INA VB. The AnyMedia Access System will support the ability to modify capacity smoothly, without interrupting existing service.

System growth can include the following basic operations:

• Adding APs to empty shelf slot positions

• Provisioning T0 cross-connects

• Adding IODS1 circuit packs to empty shelf slot positions

• Provisioning T1 cross-connects

• Adding an MDS2 shelf.

NOTE:The basic growth (and degrowth) operations may be performed by different technicians at different times without the need to complete one task before the other.

NOTE:The AnyMedia COT FAST shelf can only operate in universal mode (i.e., in conjunction with a far-end AnyMedia RT FAST shelf). The equipage and provisioning required to accomplish growth on an AnyMedia COT FAST shelf is not complete unless the corresponding equipage and provisioning has been completed at the subtending AnyMedia RT FAST shelf. All growth scenarios below for the AnyMedia COT FAST shelf assume that the corresponding RT FAST shelf growth has been completed or will be completed as a part of the universal system growth.

AP growth To install and provide service to an additional AP pack requires the following steps:

1. Dispatch a technician to the site to insert AP.


363-211-128Growth ScenariosTraditional DLC Interfaces

2. Enter cross-connect provisioning either locally at the AnyMedia Access System using the TL1SI/GSI interface or remotely from a centralized operations center.

3. Enter a cross-connect command for each individual T0 to provide service.

4. Enter a TL1 command for each T0 to provision the line termination object.

IODS1 circuit pack growth

To install and provide additional feeder capacity to a FAST shelf requires the following steps:

1. Dispatch a technician to the site to insert the IODS1 pack.

2. Enter one or more T1 cross-connect TL1 command for the IODS1 pack either to add capacity to an existing VCOT or to create a new VCOT or VB.

Adding an MDS2 shelf

An MDS2 shelf is grown by physically adding the MDS2 shelf into the bay lineup and then establishing connectivity between the MDSU on the FAST shelf and the MSC circuit packs on MDS2 shelf using the PCM link cable. Appropriate connector cables and powering and tip/ring wiring must also be supplied. Lines from CUs plugged into the MDS2 shelf are cross-connected to VCOTs and VBs in the same manner as lines on APs.

An MDS2 shelf added to an existing COT shelf will normally require that a corresponding MDS2 shelf be grown at the subtending AnyMedia RT FAST shelf. It is possible, in some cases, for lines on AnyMedia RT APs to terminate on MDS2 CUs at the COT; however, this will normally be the exception rather than the rule. MDS2 shelf growth at the COT FAST shelf cannot be considered complete unless the compatible APs and CUs have also been grown in at the RT.

System degrowth System degrowth is the removal of feeder and/or distribution capacity from an existing operational AnyMedia Access System. System capacity can be rearranged for load balancing or other needs (such as unbundling) by combining the growth and degrowth operations.

Examples of growth scenarios

Several different growth scenarios are described as follows:

• Adding line and feeder capacity

• Adding DS1 feeder via capacity activation

• Unbundling


Growth Scenarios363-211-128


• Adding an MDS2 shelf

• MDS2 degrowth.

The following growth scenarios assume that any necessary provisioning at the terminating end of the system (e.g., an analog switch) has been performed or will be completed in time to meet the planned service date. These examples illustrate the AnyMedia Access System capabilities.

Scenario 1: adding line and feeder capacity

Assume that a universal AnyMedia Access System is installed to service a low growth rate area and that it is initially equipped with the minimum line and feeder capacity required. The number of lines initially required is low, so a single TR-08 VCOT is used. When additional line capacity is eventually required, a technician is dispatched to install the necessary circuit packs. This must be done at both the RT and COT. The necessary T0 and T1 cross-connects can be provisioned remotely from a centralized operations bureau or by a technician using the TL1SI or GSI at the site. Also, if the necessary MDF cross-connections and switch translations have been made ahead of time, the technician can verify the dial tone before leaving the site.

Scenario 2: adding DS1 feeder via capacity activation

Assume a fully equipped AnyMedia Access System is installed, but only part of the line capacity is initially required to provide service. This approach may be useful in a high growth rate area to reduce the number of technician dispatches necessary to install new circuit packs. The AnyMedia Access System shelf is currently provisioned as follows:

• A TR-08 VCOT using 2 DS1s

• An INA VB using 1 DS1

• An UC VCOT using 1-20 DS1s.

Not all of the line capacity or feeder capacity is used (20 DS1s less 3 DS1s = 17 spare DS1s); a number of AP ports and DS1 ports are left without being cross-connected. From a remote operations center, enough DS1 feeder capacity is added to the TR-08 VCOT and the corresponding TR-08 VRT to support additional line growth. This capacity activation is achieved without dispatching a technician to the VCOT or VRT site.

Scenario 3: unbundling

The AnyMedia system in a universal system application can be used to unbundle services to one or more network service providers (NSPs) with a presence in a local exchange carrier's CO. A fully equipped AnyMedia COT can be installed with up to 20 TR-08 VCOTs or up to 5 UC VCOTs, each having DS1 facilities to one or more RTs. All RT subscriber lines appear on APs or CUs at the COT and are VF cabled to the field side of the MDF in the CO. Any cable appearance from the


363-211-128Growth ScenariosTraditional DLC Interfaces

COT that is connected to the MDF can be cross connected to the cable fields on the office side of the MDF that are connected to the NSP interfaces. Typically, the NSP interface consists of a cable to an NSP cage containing DLC or other transport equipment.

When a customer whose service is supported by the local exchange carrier’s AnyMedia system wishes to convert to receiving local service from an NSP, the local exchange carrier simply makes an MDF pair change to a vacant NSP pair on the MDF. No provisioning changes on the AnyMedia COT or RT are required, and no outside plant cabling changes are necessary.

Scenario 4: adding an MDS2 shelf

Assume that a standard FAST shelf was deployed to meet POTS demand, but there was spare channel capacity left on the system for future growth and several AP slots were initially left empty. Subsequently, a business moved into the serving area and a need for nonswitched and nonlocally switched circuits on the standard FAST shelf materialized. Sending a technician physically to install an MDS2 shelf at both COT and RT allowed the use of SLC-2000 and SLC Series 5 compatible channel units to provide the needed services in a timely manner. Two empty adjacent slots in the FAST shelves at both COT and RT were used for the required MDSU circuit packs needed to support the MDS2 shelf growth.

Scenario 5: MDS2 degrowth

This scenario assumes that an MDS2 shelf has been installed in an AnyMedia Access System RT bay lineup, is fully operational, and is providing both nonswitched and nonlocally switched service to a local business. Both sides of the MDS2 shelf are in use, which requires two MDSU circuit packs in the AnyMedia Access System RT shelf.

Suppose that the business moves out of the area and the special service circuits are no longer needed. The circuit packs on the MDS2 shelf are now needed on another AnyMedia Access System shelf on the other side of town. The MDS2 shelf can be degrown from both the COT and the corresponding RT. In this scenario, MDS2 shelf degrowth involves removal of the MDSU circuit packs and deleting T0 and T1 cross-connects at the RT and COT.


Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INA Telephony Configurations


611Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INA Telephony Configurations 6

Overview The AnyMedia Access System provides for flexible configurations and combinations of VCOTs and VBs, as illustrated in Figure 6-2, but the following maximums must be observed:

• 20 TR-08 VCOTs

• 20 INA VBs

• 5 UC VCOTs

The number of VCOTs and VBs may be mixed as long as the total number of DS1s does not exceed 20. As indicated in Figure 6-2 on page 6-11, lines that are cross-connected to a VCOT or a VB may be from an AP or an MDS2 shelf.

Engineering constraints

Plan according to the following constraints:

• The maximum number of DS1 lines supported is 20.

• Each TR-08 VCOT must have at least 1 and no more than 4 DS1 lines.

• Each UC VCOT must have at least 1 and no more than 20 DS1 lines.

• An INA VB can only have 1 DS1 line.

The DS1 lines on an IODS1 pack may be assigned to different VCOTs and VBs in any arbitrary fashion (e.g., it is possible to have a TR-08 with four DS1 lines all on one IODS1 pack. On a second IODS1, there may be one INA VB using one DS1, and the other three DS1s are used for another TR-08 VCOT).

Engineering INA VBs

Unless remote D4 banks are planned, special services circuits should be assigned to TR-08 VRTs, wherever possible. The number of D4 banks in the system will determine the number of INA VBs that will be required.


363-211-128 Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INATelephony ConfigurationsTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 6-2. AnyMedia Access System with Mixed VCOT and VB Configuration

Engineering constraints UC VCOT/VRT

The AnyMedia UC VCOT/VRT configuration provides flexible combinations of UC VCOTs and UC VRTs and requires a COIN_FXO_CU AP (LPA151) in the AnyMedia COT.

Note: The COIN_FXO_UC AP (LPA151) is connected to the local switch (ILEC) or to a carrier system (CLEC) in the same building (colocated). Therefore, the LPA151 complies with the intra-building specifications in GR-1089-CORE.

Logical Bandwidth Management Entities*

Logical Feeder**

21610_fig_039a

PortCircuit

PortCircuit

PortCircuit

PLN 01

PLN 02

PLN 512

PortCircuitson Aps

or MDS2

UCVCOT #1

LLN #1

LLN #513

DSX-1 ManualCross-Connect

1

2

20

DS1 Lineson DS1Packs

DS1Line

DS1Line

FeederNetwork

DS1Line

1

1

LOG FDR DS1

LOG FDR DS1

24

24

INA VirtualBank #1

INA VirtualBank #M

UCVCOT #5

LLN #1

LLN #513

LOG FDR DS1 #1**

LOG FDR DS1 #20

T1Cross-

Connection

TR-08IDT or

VRT #N

TR-08IDT orVRT #1

UCVRT #1

INA VB#1

T0Cross-

Connection

TR-08VCOT #1

LLN #1

LLN #96

LOG FDR DS1 B

LOG FDR DS1 C

LOG FDR DS1 D

TR-08VCOT #N

LLN #1

LLN #96

LOG FDR DS1 B

LOG FDR DS1 C

LOG FDR DS1 D

LOG FDR DS1 #1**

LOG FDR DS1 #20

T1Cross-

Connection

LOG FDR Ds1 A**

LOG FDR Ds1 A**

INA VB#M


Engineering Combinations of TR-08, UC and INA Telephony Configurations


The length of the VF pair is short, so that the POTS/SPOTS transmission parameters can be used; provisionable transmission settings are not needed. The LPA151 implements the same transmission parameters as the PRCOINCS AP (LPA150), but uses FXO/FXS (D4) signaling when the correct GSFN code is selected by the administrator.



363-211-128System Installation PlanningTraditional DLC Interfaces

614System Installation Planning 6

Overview This section discusses the planning necessary for the AnyMedia Access System FAST shelf installation for a CO flush mount bay.

CO flush mount bay The CO flush mount allows for installation that conforms to other equipment installed in a CO that is flush mounted. The following FAST shelf options are offered as flush mount:

• FAST shelf with replaceable FCM and duplicated power (J1C282AB-1, L1)

• FAST shelf with replaceable FCM and direct power (J1C282AC-1, L1).

All shelves have a reversible flange that offers CO flush mount with front and rear access.

Engineering the LAN Connection363-211-128


6Engineering the LAN Connection 6

LAN connection for telephony or traditional DLC services

An RJ-45 LAN connector located on the FCM on the front of the shelf is used for temporary OAM&P connections. Also, a DB9 connector (J107) is located on the rear of the shelf for a permanent OAM&P connection. Only one of these connections can be in use at a time. A factory-installed jumper cable between the rear connector and the front connector is removed when a permanent connection is made to the rear of the shelf.

Table 6-1 shows the signals on the front panel RJ-45 and Ethernet DB-9 connectors of the AnyMedia Access System.

Connection configurations

There are two configurations of LAN connections that can be made to the AnyMedia FAST shelf: one is to a direct connection and the other is through an Ethernet hub. Use the direct connection when you are accessing the COT FAST shelf with a local PC. Otherwise, use the Ethernet hub to access the COT FAST shelf through a remote OS.

The direct connection must use a “crossover” cable, which connects the transmit signal to the receive pins in both directions. The connection to an Ethernet hub uses a “straight-through” cable.

Two examples are given below to illustrate the difference between the two types of cabling.

• Example 1 illustrates the wiring for a crossover cable used with a direct connection.

• Example 2 describes the wiring for a straight-through cable, such as would be used when making a permanent connection between the backplane connector and a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.

Example interconnections

The following examples illustrate the Ethernet interconnections on the AnyMedia Access System as it is configured for traditional DLC services.

Example 1. Direct connection 6

In this example, a temporary local connection is to be made between a PC/GSI and an AnyMedia COT FAST shelf to carry out initial turn-up of the shelf.

Table 6-1. Signals on the RJ-45 and Ethernet DB-9 Connectors

DB-9 Pin Signal RJ-45 Pin2 Transmit Data + 17 Transmit Data - 21 Receive Data + 36 Receive Data - 6


363-211-128Engineering the LAN ConnectionTraditional DLC Interfaces

It is assumed that the backplane connector for the 10BaseT operations interface is not in use and that the jumper cable to the RJ-45 front faceplate connector has not been removed. In this case, a “crossover” cable is needed to connect the 10BaseT RJ45 LAN port on the PC/GSI to the RJ45 connector on the AnyMedia shelf.

The signaling on the crossover 10BaseT cable terminated with RJ-45 connectors on both ends must be as shown in Table 6-2.

This is a standard cable and can be ordered from commercial catalogs. Part numbers for the crossover cables can be found in the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide.

NOTE:DO NOT MIX THE CROSSOVER CABLE WITH THE CROSS-PINNING CABLE (pin 1 to 8, pin 2 to 7, pin 3 to 6, etc.).

Example 2. LAN connection 6

In this example, the AnyMedia COT FAST shelf turn-up has been completed, and a permanent connection is to be made between a Tier 2 NMS or AnyMedia Element Manager and the AnyMedia COT FAST shelf. To make the permanent connection, the AnyMedia COT FAST shelf will be connected to a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.

The first step is to remove the backplane J107 jumper to the RJ-45 front faceplate connector. The next step is to wire a “straight-through” cable (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, etc.) to connect the backplane J107 DB9 connector to the 10BaseT Ethernet hub. All subsequent local access to the COT FAST shelf via the PC/GSI should be made using a straight-through cable connected to the 10BaseT Ethernet hub, not the RJ45 faceplate connector.

Straight-through cables are standard cables and can be ordered from commercial catalogs. Part numbers for the straight-through cables can be found in the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide.

Table 6-2. Signals on the Crossover Cable

RJ-45 Plug Signal RJ-45 Plug1 Transmit Data + Receive Data + 32 Transmit Data - Receive Data - 63 Receive Data + Transmit Data + 16 Receive Data - Transmit Data - 2


Engineering the ROC Connection363-211-128


Engineering the ROC Connection 6

ROC overview Operations, administration, and maintenance messages may be sent to and from the FAST shelf via the ROC, when the FAST shelf is equipped with a TDM COMDAC. The ROC is a single DS0 channel (64 kbps) that is part of a DS1 feeder connected to the FAST shelf. Using the ROC as a communications link provides an alternative to a LAN connection.

There are a number of requirements for the ROC:

• A router used to channel data to the remote location

• A TCP/IP-based DCN connection

• IP address for the FAST shelf to/from which messages are sent/received

• An IP address for the DS0 on the router side, which is used to route packets intended for the FAST shelf

• Switch provisioning for a digital data line corresponding to the ROC DS0.


363-211-128Engineering the ROC ConnectionTraditional DLC Interfaces

Figure 6-3 illustrates the ROC networking.

Figure 6-3. Network Configuration Including ROC Channels




Types of ROC connections

Nailed-up connection 6

A nailed-up connection is semi-permanent. The nail-up takes place in the LDS. One ROC is groomed from each FAST shelf into one channelized DS1 dedicated to ROCs. Figure 6-4 illustrates how the DS1 carrying the ROC information is sent through a router, to the DCN, and from there to the remote location.

Figure 6-4. Nailed-up Connection Network Configuration

This allows more than one ROC to be carried back to the remote location on one DS1. Note that the DS0s enter the fabric of the switch. This nailed-up connection does require resources in the switch itself.

Hair-pinned connection 6

A hair-pinned connection routes the DS1s carrying the ROCs from the FAST shelf to the IDCU, avoiding consumption of switch resources. This configuration is shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. Hair-pinned Connection Configuration


363-211-128Engineering the ROC ConnectionTraditional DLC Interfaces

Note that at least one DS1 line is required in each IDCU for the ROC channel(s). If two or more DS1 lines are dedicated to ROC channels, a DCS can be used to combine them before they are sent to the router, which better utilizes the router port.

INA connections 6

An INA connection for the ROC provides a semi-permanent ROC connection directly to the router or through the DCS. The INA configuration through the router is shown in Figure 6-6. The INA configuration via the DCS, shown in Figure 6-7, does not consume any switch capacity, but requires a DCS.

Figure 6-6. ROCs Over INA Connection to the Router

Figure 6-7. ROCs Over INA Connection via the DCS




ROC used in an AnyMedia Universal Concentrator

If an AnyMedia Universal Concentrator (UC) is used, the AnyMedia RTs are managed by ROC channels with the COT serving as a gateway for these ROCs. The COT is capable of supporting up to 5 ROC channels to the UC RTs. Both the COT shelf and the RT shelf are separate management entities and a management system (e.g. GSI, OS) must set up independent management connections to each of the two systems. Typically, the standard OAM&P interface to the COT is via the RJ-45 LAN connector located on the FCM on the front of the shelf. The COMDAC serves to forward IP traffic from the LAN to the RTs via the ROCs (and vice-versa).


363-211-128COT Default Configuration ProvisioningTraditional DLC Interfaces

COT Default Configuration Provisioning 6

Overview The AnyMedia COT System GSI provides a capability to provision the COT FAST shelf with default cross-connect and environmental alarm information. There are several different default COT configurations depending on whether there is an MDS2, one-half of an MDS2 or no MDS2. The default configurations provision T1 and T0 cross-connects for the COT plus a set of five environmental alarms. These default configurations can be installed during turn-up procedures using the GSI. These default configurations are actually GSI script files and are located in the “script” directory on the GSI CD-ROM, which is shipped as a standard part of the COT equipment package.

The advantage of the GSI scripts is that they can be run or overlaid onto a COT system that has been previously provisioned without wiping out other provisioned system parameters. The purpose of the COT default configurations is to reduce the technician time necessary to turn up a system and to reduce the probability of operational errors during turn-up. In addition, the COT default configurations have been specifically designed to allow the COT to work properly with Telcordia TransPort Element Activation Manager OS. The Telcordia’s TransPort Element Activation Manager OSs require that T1 and T0 cross-connects be preprovisioned at the COT to support flow-through service order provisioning. By providing default environmental alarm mapping to autonomous messages, the default configurations also support TL1-based monitoring and surveillance OSs such as Telcordia NMA. The following are descriptions of the COT default configurations.

NOTE:Default provisioning does not provision either ROCs or MISC alarm inputs at a COT. These must be provisioned manually.

COT default mappings 6

A set of 5 GSI scripts are provided that can be used to provision the AnyMedia COT according to the desired application. The first three scripts provision for the following applications:

• deployment of COT with no MDS2

• COT with MDS2 half equipped

• COT with MDS2 fully equipped

Script number 4 provisions 5 TR-08 VCOTs in the same way as the ED-VEQPT TL1 command with the vcfg-2 parameter. Script number 5 is identical to script #1 except it does not perform T0 cross-connect provisioning.

In addition to the five GSI script files, there is an extra provisioning file that can (optionally) be run after script number 4 to add the same alarm information as the other scripts.


COT Default Configuration Provisioning363-211-128


The script files provided are listed as follows:

• cot_R_1_2_3_no_mds2.txt (script #1)

• cot_R_1_2_3_half_mds2.txt (script #2)

• cot_R_1_2_3_both_mds2.txt (script #3)

• cot_R_1_2_3_crs_T1T0_ent_T0.txt (script #4)

• cot_R_1_2_3_crs_T1_set_attr.txt (script #5)

• cot_R_1_2_3_extraProv.txt

The name of each file specifies the NETYPE (COT or RT) that it applies to plus the application software release. The GSI will warn the user if he tries to use a script file on a shelf that is incompatible with the file name. Since these are *.txt files, they can be opened with a text editor such as Microsoft WordPad*. The header lines of each file specify in more detail what each file does.

The subtending AnyMedia RT must be provisioned in a manner that is consistent with the COT provisioning. To facilitate this, a set of RT-specific GSI scripts are provided with the system. These RT-specific GSI scripts are the mirror image of the scripts provided for the COT as follows:

• rt_R_1_2_2_no_mds2.txt (script #1)

• rt_R_1_2_2_half_mds2.txt (script #2)

• rt_R_1_2_2_both_mds2.txt (script #3)

• rt_R_1_2_2_crs_T1T0_ent_T0.txt (script #4)

• rt_R_1_2_2_crs_T1_set_attr.txt (script #5)

• rt_R_1_2_2_extraProv.txt

Default mapping number 1: No MDS2 6

The AnyMedia COT supports a default mapping with five TR-08 VCOTs mapped to 480 lines on APs in slots 1-15 (no MDS2). There are five slots for IODS1 circuit packs on the AnyMedia COT shelf. Each IODS1 pack corresponds to one VCOT. DS1-1-1 corresponds to the “A” DS1 line on VCOT 1, etc. DS1-5-4 corresponds to the “D” line on VCOT 5. The default mapping for the T0 cross-connects is as follows:

DS1 1 (DS0s sequential 1-24) to AP in slot 1, lines 1-24)DS1 2 to AP slot 1 lines 25-32, AP in slot 2 lines 1-16...DS1 20 to AP in slot 15 lines 9-32

* WordPad is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation



Default mapping number 2: One-half MDS2 (the half that houses slots 1 through 12) 6

The AnyMedia COT supports a default mapping with five TR-08 VCOTs mapped to 432 lines on APs in slots 1-13 and AP in slot 16. In addition, 48 lines are mapped to the half that houses slots 1 through 12 of MDS2 shelf for a total of 480 lines. There are five slots for IODS1 circuit packs on the AnyMedia COT shelf. Each IODS1 pack corresponds to one VCOT. DS1-1-1 corresponds to the “A” DS1 line on VCOT 1, etc. DS1-5-4 shall correspond to the “D” line on VCOT 5. The default mapping for the T0 cross-connects is as follows:

DS1 1 (DS0s sequential 1-24) to AP in slot 1, lines 1-24)DS1 2 to AP in slot 1 lines 25-32, AP in slot 2 lines 1-16,...DS1 18 to AP in slot 13 lines 25-32, AP in slot 16 lines 1-16 DS1 19 to MDS2 lines 1 to 24DS1 20 to MDS2 lines 25-48

NOTE:One MDSU is in AP slot 14, AP slot 15 is left empty, which is reserved for MDSU growth. MDSU growth requires depopulating APs on DS1s 17 and 18.

Default mapping number 3: Full MDS2 6

The AnyMedia COT supports a default mapping with five TR-08 VCOTs mapped to 384 lines on APs in slots 1-12. In addition, 96 lines are mapped to an MDS2 shelf for a total of 480 lines. There are five slots for IODS1 circuit packs on the AnyMedia COT shelf. Each IODS1 pack corresponds to one VCOT. DS1-1-1corresponds to the “A” DS1 line on VCOT 1, etc. DS1-5-4 corresponds to the “D” line on VCOT 5. The default mapping for the T0 cross-connects is as follows:

DS1 1 (DS0s sequential 1-24) to AP in slot 1, lines 1-24)DS1 2 to AP in slot1 lines 25-32, AP in slot 2 lines 1-16

.

.

.

DS1 16 to AP in slot12 lines 9-32DS1 17 to MDS2 lines 1 to 24DS1 18 to MDS2 lines 25-48DS1 19 to MDS2 lines 49-72DS1 20 to MDS2 lines 73-96

NOTE:One MDSU is in AP slot 14, the second is in AP slot 15.




Default mapping number 4 6

Default mapping number 4 provisions 5 TR08 VCOTs the same as the ED-VEQPT TL1 command with vcfg-2 parameter, as illustrated in Table 6-3 (T0 cross-connections) and Table 6-4 on page 6-25 (T1 cross-connections). If ED-VEQPT vcfg2 is executed at the COT, it also should be executed at the RT for compatibility.

Related provisioning commands include: ENT-CRS-T0, DLT-CRS-T0, RTRV-CRS-T0, ED-VEQPT.

Table 6-3. Default T0 Cross-Connections for ED-VEQPT Command

VCFG Parameter T0 Cross-Connections

vcfg-2

480 cross-connections for 5 TR-08 VCOTs:

v8dp-1-1 : drop-1-1-1v8dp-1-2 : drop-1-1-2v8dp-1-3 : drop-1-1-3v8dp-1-4 : drop-1-1-4...v8dp-1-95 : drop-1-3-31v8dp-1-96 : drop-1-3-32v8dp-2-1 : drop-1-4-1v8dp-2-2 : drop-1-4-2...v8dp-5-94 : drop-1-15-30v8dp-5-95 : drop-1-15-31v8dp-5-96 : drop-1-15-32



Related provisioning commands: ENT-CRS-T1, DLT-CRS-T1, RTRV-CRS-T1, ED-VEQPT.


Default mapping number 5 is identical to script #1 (480 lines of POTS on 5 VCOTs), except that it does not perform T0 cross-connect provisioning. The purpose of default mapping number 5 is to provision the AnyMedia COT to be compatible with the Telecordia Switch OS, which does the provisioning of the T0 cross-connects at the COT.


Default mapping number 6 provisions 5 UC VCOTs the same as the ED-VEQPT TL1 command with vcfg-5 parameter, as illustrated in Table 6-5 on page 6-26 (T0 cross-connections) and Table 6-6 on page 6-26 (T1 cross-connections). If ED-VEQPT vcfg-5 is executed at the COT, it also should be executed at the RT for compatibility.

Note: Each single UC VCOT can provide up to 512 lines, but the sum of 512 lines can not be exceeded by 5 UC VCOTs used at the same time.



vcfg-2

20 cross-connections for 5 TR-08 VCOTs:

v8fdr-1-a : ds1-1-1-1v8fdr-1-b : ds1-1-1-2v8fdr-1-c : ds1-1-1-3v8fdr-1-d : ds1-1-1-4v8fdr-2-a : ds1-1-2-1v8fdr-2-b : ds1-1-2-2...v8fdr-5-b : ds1-1-5-2v8fdr-5-c : ds1-1-5-3v8fdr-5-d : ds1-1-5-4




Related provisioning commands include: ENT-CRS-T0, DLT-CRS-T0, RTRV-CRS-T0, ED-VEQPT.

Related provisioning commands: ENT-CRS-T1, DLT-CRS-T1, RTRV-CRS-T1, ED-VEQPT.

UCC provisioning script

A set of 3 GSI scripts are provided that can be used to provision a universal communication channel (UCC) to an RT. The script files provided are listed as follows:

• cot_R_1_2_3_roc_both_mds2.txt

• cot_R_1_2_3_roc_half_mds2.txt

• cot_R_1_2_3_roc_no_mds2.txt



vcfg-5

512 cross-connections for 5 UC VCOTs:

ucdp-1-1 : drop-1-1-1ucdp-1-2 : drop-1-1-2ucdp-1-3 : drop-1-1-3..ucdp-1-511 : drop-1-16-30ucdp-1-512 : drop-1-16-31



vcfg-5

20 cross-connections for 5 UC VCOTs:

ucfdr-1-1 : ds1-1-1-1ucfdr-1-2 : ds1-1-1-2ucfdr-1-3 : ds1-1-1-3..ucfdr-1-19 : ds1-1-5-3ucfdr-1-20 : ds1-1-5-4



T0 cross-connection parameters

Upon the initialization of the system’s nonvolatile data memory, all T0 cross-connection data are erased. Execution of the optional ED-VEQPT command establishes a set of default T0 cross-connections according to the VCFG (VCOT preset configuration) parameter.

AnyMedia COT environmental alarm mappings

Default provisioning numbers 1, 2 and 3 6

The AnyMedia COT supports the same set of environmental alarms for each of the default mappings. The environmental alarm mappings are in addition to the T1 and T0 cross-connect mappings. There are five VCOTs preprovisioned on the AnyMedia COT and each VCOT is capable of transporting a single independent environmental alarm via the power minor/miscellaneous bit. All COT default mappings have the same environmental alarm mapping as shown in Table 6-7.

As with the T1 and T0 default cross-connects discussed above, the technician can change any or all of these default provisioning parameters to suit the particular application at hand.

NOTE:The COT environmental alarms may not work properly unless the RT environmental alarms are provisioned the same way.

Table 6-7. Default RT Environmental Alarm Mappings at the COT

VCOT TR-08 Data Link Alarm Type ATU Contact Closure

1 Power Major 1

2 BD—Battery on Discharge 2

3 ACF—AC Power Failure 3

4 Temperature 4

5 Tamper 5


Default System Parameter Provisioning Selection363-211-128


6Default System Parameter Provisioning Selection 6

Overview This section provides a summary of the default provisioning parameters for the AnyMedia COT to support the selection of default system parameters. The listed parameter values are restored when the INIT-SYS TL1 command is executed during the initialization of the system.

T0 transmission parameters

Upon the initialization of the system’s nonvolatile data memory, all per-line T0 provisioning data are initialized. Execution of the optional ED-VEQPT command copies the contents of the T0 default object to all line terminations of the system.

After initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, the provisioning parameters for the T0 default object are as follows:

CLEI noneGSFN dflt2LOSS fixedEFTT yes

These parameters may be changed by the ED-T0DFLT command before the ED-VEQPT command is executed.

Related provisioning commands: ED-T0DFLT, ED-VEQPT, ENT-T0, ED-T0, RTRV-T0, DLT-T0.

Synchronization parameters

The default system synchronization parameters, which are established by initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, are as follows:

SYNCNMODE EXT64LPPRI ds1-1-1-1LPSEC ds1-1-2-1EXTLINECD b8zsEXTFMT esf

Related provisioning commands: SET-SYNCN, RTRV-SYNCN.

DS1 Performance Management parameters

The default DS1 Performance Management parameters, established by initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, are as follows:


363-211-128Default System Parameter Provisioning SelectionTraditional DLC Interfaces

CSS-P, 15 min 1CSS-P, 1 day 4ES-P, 15 min 65ES-P, 1 day 648SEFS-P, 15 min 2SEFS-P, 1 day 17SES-P, 15 min 10SES-P, 1 day 100UAS-P, 15 min 3UAS-P, 1 day 10

Related provisioning command: SET-TH, RTRV-TH.

DS1 line parameters The default DS1 line parameters, which are established by initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, are as follows:

EQLZ 0DGTH 6

Related provisioning command: ED-T1, RTRV-T1.

OAM&P interface parameters

The default IP parameters, which are established by initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, are as follows:

Related provisioning commands: SET-IP, RTRV-IP.

SID The default SID is system00.

Related provisioning commands: SET-SID, RTRV-HDR.

Table 6-8. Default IP Addresses for Communications Interfaces

Interface IP Address Submask Remote IP Address

Ethernet 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 N/A

ROC 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

CIT 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0




Autonomous message map provisioning

Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, all autonomous messages are routed to all operations interfaces.

CIT allEOC allTL1MAINTENANCE allTL1MEMORYADMINISTRATION allTL1OTHER1 allTL1TEST all

Related provisioning commands: ENT-MSGMAP, RTRV-MSGMAP.

Security provisioning

Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, the following user names and passwords are established:

LUCENT01 UI-PSWD-01

LUCENT02 UI-PSWD-02

Related provisioning commands: ED-USER-SECU, RTRV-USER-SECU.

Security configuration provisioning

Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, the following security configuration parameters are established:

PREMSG "" (that is empty string)

POSTMSG "" (that is empty string)

DURAL 2

DURLOGIN 900

MXINV 0

DURALARM 15

Related provisioning commands: SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT, RTRV-ATTR-SECUDFLT.

Time and date provisioning

Upon initialization, the time and date are set to the following:

TIME 00:00:00DATE 1970:01:01

Related provisioning commands: ED-DAT, RTRV-HDR.



Equipage provisioning

Upon initialization, the equipage provisioning for the system is as follows:

COMDAC-1-1 rCOMDAC-1-2 rIODS1P-1 rall others nr

r = requirednr = not required

NOTE:Any circuit pack that is plugged into the shelf at the time of system initialization defaults to the required equipage state.

Related provisioning commands: ED-CONFIG, RTRV-CONFIG.

Ringing generator The system automatically defaults to ringing generator required if any AP or CU in the system requires ringing. If there is no AP or CU in the system that requires ringing, and if a ringing generator is required, run the SET-RINGGEN-VEQPT TL1 command.

Alarm severity provisioning

The severity of alarm conditions is provisionable. Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data memory, the severities in Table 6-9 are established. Related provisioning commands: SET-ALMCDE, RTRV-ALMCDE.

Table 6-9. Alarm Severity Defaults

AID Condition Service Affect

Default Severity (NTFCNCDE1

[,NTFCNCDE2])

ap-1-all

CABLE SA mj

IMPROPRMVL SA mj

INT SA mj

POLL SA mj

PRCDERR SA mj

atu-1IMPROPRMVL NSA mn

INT NSA mn

POLL NSA mn




comdac-1-all

CPYMEMF NSA mn

DBCRRPT NSA mn

DBMEMTRF NSA mn

IMPROPRMVL NSA mn

INT NSA mn

INT SA cr

PRCDERR NSA mn

SFTCRRPT NSA mn

SFTERR NSA mn

SWFTDWNF NSA mn

UNLATCH NSA mn

ctu-1INT NSA mn

IMPROPRMVL NSA mn

POLL NSA mn

cu-1-allINTRMVL SA mn

PRCDERR SA mn

drop-1-all INT SA mn

ds1-1-all

AIS SA mj

DIGRPF SA mj

LOF SA mj

LOS SA mj

SYNC NSA mn

SYNC SA cr

T-BERL SA mj

T-BERL NSA mn

YEL SA mj

ext-1-allSYNC SA cr

SYNC NSA mn

Table 6-9. Alarm Severity Defaults (Continued)



[,NTFCNCDE2])



Environmental alarm provisioning defaults 6

The environmental alarm defaults are established as shown in Table 6-10. Use of these alarms is described in COT Alarm Engineering on page 6-35. The

iods1-1-alliods1p-1

IMPROPRMVL NSA mn

IMPROPRMVL SA mj

INT NSA mn

INT SA mj

POLL NSA mn

POLL SA mj

m2drop-1-all TSTRELAY NSA mn

mds2-1 PRCEDRR SA mj

msc-1-allINT SA mj

POLL SA mj

ptu-1-allINTRMVL SA mj

POLL SA mj

RINGF SA mj

pwrf-1-all PWR SA cr

pwrm-1-all PWR SA mj

sh-1BKUPMEMP SA cr

RINGF SA cr

SYNCOOS SA cr

tr8dl-all INT NSA mn

v08-allDIGRPF SA mj

EXT NSA mn

EXT SA mj

ucdl-allINT SA cr,mj

INT NSA mn

INHALM NSA mn

uc-allINT SA cr,mj

INT NSA mn

INHALM NSA mn

Table 6-9. Alarm Severity Defaults (Continued)



[,NTFCNCDE2])




miscellaneous alarm inputs appear on leads TLMI-1 through 8, which correspond to MISC[1 through 8]. See Environmental alarms on page 5-35.

Related provisioning command: SET-ATTR-ENV.

Table 6-10. Miscellaneous Input Environmental Alarm Default Severities

AID Alarm Type Default Severitya

a. If the environmental alarm parameters have not been provisioned, the defaultvalues are minor (mn).

atucc-1-{1-42}ctucc-1-{1-2}mc-1-{1-8}v08-{1-20}ucmisc-{1-5}-{1-20}

ACF mn

BD mj

FAN mn

MJF mj

MNF mn

PMJ mj

PMN mn

PWR cr

TAMPER mn

MISC1 mn

MISC2 mn

MISC3 mn

MISC4 mn

MISC5 mn

MISC6 mn

MISC7 mn

MISC8 mn


363-211-128COT Alarm EngineeringTraditional DLC Interfaces

6COT Alarm Engineering 6

Overview The AnyMedia COT provides a full set of alarm capabilities, including visible LED alarm and status indicators, local office audible and visible alarms, remote telemetry alarm relay closures, autonomous TL1 messages, and an alarm history log, accessible through the operations interface. Both local and remote alarm relay closures can be provided by either the ATU or the CTU. The difference are:

• The CTU can only provide remote telemetry closures for two miscellaneous environmental alarms, whereas the ATU can support up to 42 closures.

• The the CTU does not provide an output for the near end (NE) or power minor (PMN) status indicators.

COT alarm features The following list summarizes the high-level alarm features and capabilities of the COT FAST shelf:

• COT FAST shelf supports the ATU for parallel telemetry interface

• No provisioning required for CR, MJ, MN, PMN, SID and NE alarms

• Audible, visible and telemetry alarm relays

• Alarms multipled across all VCOTs in shelf

• One SID per shelf (telemetry only)

• Support of ACO and RACO

• ATU provides 42 user programmable telemetry relays

• Provisionable PMN/MISC alarms (one per VRT)

Assignment of miscellaneous/environmental alarms must be individually provisioned at both the RT and COT using TL1 commands. The topics “RT assignment of miscellaneous alarms” and “COT assignment of environmental alarms,” following, illustrate the miscellaneous/environmental alarm capability by presenting an example alarm mapping at the AnyMedia RT and the corresponding mapping at the AnyMedia COT. There is a considerable amount of flexibility in how these mappings are made. However, the mappings must be consistent to ensure that the alarms indicated at the COT correspond to the alarms generated at the RT.

RT assignment of miscellaneous alarms

The CTUs on the AnyMedia COT and RT each provide 8 miscellaneous alarm input detectors that may be wired to environmental alarm sensors located in the CO or remote site. These sensors sense environmental alarm conditions, such as AC power failure, fan, fuse, and other user-definable miscellaneous alarm events.


COT Alarm Engineering363-211-128


At the COT, it is necessary to assign these sensor closure inputs to alarm output indicators. This is accomplished using the SET-ATTR-ENV command, as illustrated in the following examples. At the RT, instead of mapping the environmental alarm inputs directly to alarm output indicators, they are mapped to specific bits in the TR-08 data links between the RT and COT. Then, at the COT end of the link, these bits are mapped to alarm output closures. To avoid confusion, the assignment (provisioning) of RT environmental alarms should use the same mapping at both the RT and the COT.

An example of the miscellaneous alarm assignment at the RT FAST shelf is shown in Figure 6-8 on page 6-36. The TR-08 data link found on the A digroup supports a single bit in the RT to COT direction that can be used to send power minor or miscellaneous alarms (a.k.a. the PMN/MISC bit).

NOTE:The UC data link between a UC VRT/VCOT does not use the PMN/MISC bit (single bit) like the TR-08 data link to transfer environmental alarms. The UC data link is message-based and supports up to 20 bits for this purpose, see Figure 6-12 on page 6-43.

The following examples illustrate how the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 command is used to map relay closures to alarms and alarm types to TR-08 VRT data links at both the COT and RT.

Figure 6-8. Example of an RT Assignment of Miscellaneous Alarms Using the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 Command on TR-08 data link

21610_fig_133a

FAST RT

MISC8/TEMP

AC PWR

FAN

TAMPER

M5 (FAN/TEMP)

M2 (TAMPER)

M1 (AC POWER)

LEGEND

To COTVRT5

To COTVRT2

To COTVRT1

Set-attr-env::mc-1-1:::TAMPER;Set-attr-env::mc-1-2:::MISC8,FAN;Set-attr-env::mc-1-3:::MJ,ACF;Set-attr-env::mc-1-8:::MISC8,TEMP;Set-attr-env::v08-1:::ACF;Set-attr-env::v08-2:::TAMPER;Set-attr-env::v08-5:::MISC8,FAN/TEMP;

CTU

TLM1 TLM2 TLM3 TLM8

M1, M2, M3... - Power Minor/Miscellaneous biton TR-08 data link



If there is only a single VRT at a site, there is only a single TR-08 data link and, hence, only a single PMN/MISC bit available to send information back to the CO. In this case, the PMN/MISC bit will almost invariably be used to indicate that local AC power has been lost and that the system is on battery backup. Since this is not service affecting in and of itself, it is called a power minor. If local power is not restored before the batteries run out (usually about 8 hours, depending on the traffic load), all DS1 lines from the RT will fail, and this will cause a major or critical alarm to be generated at the COT.

If there is more than one TR-08 VRT at one or more sites, the PMN/MISC bit from the second and subsequent RTs can be used for a variety of different alarms. Miscellaneous alarms often are used to indicate, for example, an open door or potential equipment-threatening events, such as high temperature or high humidity. In this example, fan and temperature are sent on the same data link.

COT assignment of environmental alarms

The capability for mapping miscellaneous alarms to ATU relay closures at the COT FAST shelf is illustrated in Figure 6-9 on page 6-39. The COT alarm mapping in Figure 6-9 corresponds to the RT alarm mapping shown in Figure 6-8. The alarm mapping capability enables one miscellaneous alarm for each individual TR-08 VCOT to be mapped to one of the available ATU telemetry-compatible relays, of which there are a total of 42.

This mapping is accomplished using the same SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 command used at the RT shelf. The COT FAST shelf may be partitioned into as many as 20 distinct VCOTs, one DS1 line per VCOT. This enables up to 20 miscellaneous alarms to be received via the VRT data links, each of which can be mapped into one of the 23 (including NONE) available alarm types shown in Table 6-11. The same alarm type can be assigned to more than one alarm source, and each alarm type can be mapped to any of the 42 telemetry relays in the AIU.

Table 6-11. Alarm Types

# ALMTYPE Description Default Alarm Severity1 ACB1 All Channels Busy 1 mn2 ACB2 All Channels Busy 2 mn3 ACB3 All Channels Busy 3 mn4 ACB4 All Channels Busy 4 mn5 ACB5 All Channels Busy 5 mn6 ACF AC loss (AC input power failure) mn (minor)7 BD Battery on discharge mj (major)8 FAN Fan unit failed mn9 MISC1 Miscellaneous 1 mn10 MISC2 Miscellaneous 2 mn11 MISC3 Miscellaneous 3 mn




The ATU receives alarm information from the COMDAC over a proprietary data link (see Figure 6-9 on page 6-39) and uses this information to close the appropriate relays to audible, visible, and telemetry alarms. Operationally, there is a need for either a local technician or a remote maintenance center to shut off the audible and telemetry alarms while retaining the visible alarm indicators. This is done locally by an ACO push button on the COT FAST shelf’s CTU and remotely via a telemetry input to the ATU.

NOTE:The mapping between alarm type and TR-08 or UC data link should be the same at both COT and RT. The alarm type ACB1 to ACB5 are only valid for the atucc and ctucc AIDs.

12 MISC4 Miscellaneous 4 mn13 MISC5 MIscellaneous 5 mn14 MISC6 MIscellaneous 6 mn15 MISC7 MIscellaneous 7 mn16 MISC8 MIscellaneous 8 mn17 MJF Fuse major mj18 MNF Fuse minor mn19 NONE None none20 PMJ Power major mj21 PMN Power minor mn22 PWR Power cr (critical)23 Tamper Intrusion (door open) mn

Table 6-11. Alarm Types

# ALMTYPE Description Default Alarm Severity



Figure 6-9. COT Assignment of Miscellaneous Alarms Using the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 Command on TR-08 data link

Fan and FCM bus failure alarms

Two cables are available to connect the fan alarm at J12 and the FCM fuse alarm outputs at J16 to the TMLI-(x) inputs of the COT FAST shelf. The alarms connect to the FAST shelf at either J111A (first cable) or J111 (second cable). The first cable is required in applications where the miscellaneous alarm interface is either wired from J111 to a cross-connect, or if the interface is multipled between several COT FAST shelves (leaving only J111A available). The second cable is preferred if neither the external connection to J111 nor the alarm multiple is used, leaving J111 available for this purpose.

21610_fig_134a

COT ShelfFAST

COMDAC

CTU

Serial

Telemetry

CL38 CL39

MaintenanceCenter

CRMJ

MNNE

SID

AC PWR

M5 (FAN/TEMP)

M2 (TAMPER)

M1 (AC POWER)

FAN/TEMP

TAMPER

COT_FAN

COT POWER FEED A FAIL

COT POWER FEED B FAIL

COT FAN ALARM

To VRT5( VCOT5

To VRT2VCOT2

To VRT1VCOT1

ATU

RACO

COT_MJF

RACOParallel

CL1

TLM1

CL2

TLM2

TLM3

CL42

LEGEND


Set-attr-env::mc-1-1:::MJF;Set-attr-env::mc-1-2:::MJF;Set-attr-env::mc-1-3:::FAN;Set-attr-env::atucc-1-1:::MJ,ACF;Set-attr-env::atucc-1-2:::MISC8;Set-attr-env::atucc-1-38:::MJF;Set-attr-env::atucc-1-39:::FAN;Set-attr-env::atucc-1-42:::TAMPER;Set-attr-env::v08-1:::ACF;Set-attr-env::v08-2:::TAMPER;Set-attr-env::v08-5:::MN,MISC8,FAN/TEMP;




• The first cable (Comcode: 848600920) connects:

— the Fan Alarm to the TMLI-3 alarm input— the fuse alarm output “–48V A Fail” to TMLI-1— “–48V B Fail” to TMLI-2.

This cable also connects to J11 and P11 to provide a source of –48V RTN (GND) for the alarm function.

• The other adapter cable (Comcode 848571790) is identical to the first cable, except that the connection to P11 and J11 is not provided. GND is obtained directly from the J111 Misc Alarm interface on the FAST shelf.

Using the ATU or CTU for central office alarm interface

The COT shelf is maintained as a single entity via hardwired relay closures on the ATU for CR, MJ, MN, PMN, NE and Shelf ID. The alarm relays will be operated by the ATU without the need for craft provisioning. These alarm indicators are multipled across all TR-08 VCOTs, UC VCOTs, and INA VBs in the shelf. When you have the option of using a CTU or ATU for CO audible alarms, the ATU is recommended over the CTU.

Alternatively, the alarm output relays on the CTU can be used if a more limited alarm capability is acceptable (see TR-08 VCOT example on Figure 6-10). The CTU supports CR, MJ and MN closures for visible, audible, and telemetry alarms plus SID and two miscellaneous telemetry alarms (OFC1 and OFC2). The miscellaneous alarm relay closures are provisioned using the SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 command with the AID parameters ctucc-1-1 and ctucc-1-2.

Figure 6-10. Miscellaneous Alarms at COT FAST Shelf with DTP101, DTP102, DTP103 or DTP104 CTU

21610_fig_135a

COT ShelfFAST

CTU

MaintenanceCenter

RACO

RACO

AC PWR

M2 (TAMPER)

M1 (AC PWR)

CRITICAL

MAJOR

MINOR

TAMPER

To VRT2VCOT2

To VRT1VCOT1

Set-attr-env::ctucc-1-1:::MJ,ACF;Set-attr-env::ctucc-1-2:::TAMPER;Set-attr-env::v08-1:::ACF;Set-attr-env::v08-2:::TAMPER;

OFC2

OFC1

Telemetry

LEGEND




Local COT alarms It may be desirable to map some alarms generated locally to the COT into COT system bay/telemetry alarms. For example, the fan alarms or power bus failure alarm closures for an entire bay might be combined into a single alarm. In this case, the COT CTU miscellaneous alarm input detectors can be used to incorporate this information into the COT system alarms. (See Figure 6-9 on page 6-39 and Figure 6-11 on page 6-42.)

Overview of miscellaneous alarm mappings

Figure 6-11 on page 6-42 shows an overview of the miscellaneous alarm mappings at both the RT and COT FAST shelves via TR-08 data link. All arrows point to the left, since that is the direction the miscellaneous alarms propagate. Each miscellaneous alarm relay input closure on the RT CTU can be mapped to a unique alarm type. A given alarm type can be mapped to multiple VRTs if so desired. This capability could be useful in an unbundling configuration where not all VRTs terminate at the same location. Multiple alarm types also can be assigned to the same VRT data link. To make the alarm types at the RT and COT agree, the same mappings should be set at COT and RT using SET-ATTR-ENV TL1 command.

The alarm types (ALMTYPE) and default severities referred to in Figure 6-11 are listed in Table 6-11 on page 6-37.




Figure 6-11. Overview of Miscellaneous Alarms Mappings at COT and RT via TR-08 data link



Figure 6-12. Overview of Miscellaneous Alarms Mappings at COT and RT via UC data link

atucc12

COT

UC

ALMTYPE

ofc

mc

42

UC

1

2

12

20

12

12

12

23

ALMTYPE12

23

mc12

8

8

m20

m2m1

RT

3

4

5

UC12

20

ALMTYPE12

23

mc12

8

21610_fig_136a

m20

m2

m1


DS1 Feeders363-211-128


64DS1 Feeders 6

Overview The DS1 feeders terminate on the IODS1 circuit packs in the AnyMedia FAST shelf. The IODS1 supports a DS1 interface as specified in T1.102-1993. This DS1 interface is intended to be used as an intrasite or intraoffice interconnect. The DS1 interface supports a limited transmission distance from the COT FAST shelf to the DSX-1 cross connect panel depending on the type of cable used, typically no more than 655 feet for 22 gauge wire.

Line code The AMI line code is supported by the DS1 interface. The ones density assurance techniques supported by the line code include the following:

• B8ZS

• ZCS

These techniques may be provisioned individually for each DS1 feeder via a TL1 command.

For TR-08 feeders, the line code should normally be set to ZCS. For INA VB the proper line code setting will depend on the application. In every case, the line code set at the AnyMedia COT must match the line code of the far-end termination. The choice of line code setting may also be dependent on the line code setting of any intermediate multiplexing or digital cross-connect equipment.

AMI AMI is a binary signal in which no pulse indicates a binary 0, and a pulse with polarity opposite to the previous pulse indicates a 1. AMI is also called a bipolar signal.

B8ZS The B8ZS technique replaces any sequence of eight consecutive zeros with a code to represent the eight zero bits. B8ZS is the default technique and will ensure a sufficient ones density in the DS1 signal without affecting the payload.

ZCS ZCS may be required for some interoffice INA DS1 signals. When a DS1 signal is provisioned for ZCS, the system employs a ZCS technique on the DS0 signals that carry VF services in that DS1. This ZCS technique replaces the seventh bit (second least significant bit) with a binary one in each DS0 that contains an all zero code.


363-211-128DS1 FeedersTraditional DLC Interfaces

Framing formats The system supports different DS1 framing formats:

• ESF

• SF

— Traditional D4 framing used for DS1 facilities— Modified for TR-08.

The SF and ESF formats are defined in T1.107-1988. TR-08 DS1 signals use the Fs′ format. INA DS1 signals can be provisioned to use either the SF or ESF format. DS1s used solely for timing purposes (i.e., a DS1 that is not part of a TR-08 or INA interface) can use either the SF or ESF format.

Serving range The maximum distance between a COT and RT in a universal AnyMedia Access System may be determined using Figure 6-13. The range depends on the echo path delay (EPD) of the serving LDS and on the echo path delay contribution of any other transmission-related equipment that is in the DS1 path (e.g., multiplexers). The graph represents the allocation of half of a total EPD budget of 6.5 ms, as specified by Telcordia Technologies, Inc. TR-NWT-000507, Issue 5 (LSSGR Transmission).

To use the figure, compute the total EPD contribution of the transmission equipment in the DS1 path and locate the corresponding point on the horizontal axis. Project a vertical line upward to intersect the appropriate LDS EPD line. Read the corresponding maximum serving range from the vertical axis.

For example: Assume that a point-to-point SONET system will provide the DS1 transport for an installation of the universal AnyMedia Access System and that the EPD of each SONET multiplexer is 0.10 ms. Two SONET multiplexers will be included in the DS1 path (one at the LDS, one at the remote site). The total EPD of the SONET equipment is, therefore, 0.20 ms. If the EPD of the serving switch is 1.0 ms, then Figure 6-13 yields a maximum DS1 serving range of approximately 34 miles.


DS1 Feeders363-211-128


Figure 6-13. Maximum DS1 Line Distance for Universal AnyMedia Access System versus Delay Contribution by Other Transmission-Related Equipment


363-211-128Synchronization and TimingTraditional DLC Interfaces

632Synchronization and Timing 6

Overview Network synchronization is critical for error-free services. Synchronization problems show up as clicking on voice calls, retransmission or errors on data and facsimile calls, or possible dropping of calls altogether. Proper synchronization engineering will ensure transmission quality and network performance by reducing timing slips and limiting network degradation from synchronization faults that are passed on to the AnyMedia Access System. The AnyMedia COT FAST shelf supports several different timing modes:

• Line-timed mode

• External DS1 (1.544 MHz) timing

• External composite clock (64/8 kHz) timing

• Free-running mode.

In a universal configuration, the RT normally is loop timed while the COT normally has external timing. It is possible for both RT and COT ends to have external timing.

External synchronization sources

The AnyMedia Access COT normally will be synchronized to external clock signal inputs from a building timing supply. The following attributes apply to external synchronization sources:

• Either DS1 (1.544 MHz) or composite clock (64/8 kHz) sources may be selected. The signal type is selected via a TL1 provisioning command.

• A composite clock signal is recommended for the external synchronization source for COTs. Composite clock signals can be multipled to all shelves in a bay, so that fewer bay-level inputs are needed than for DS1 external synchronizing. Also, composite clock signals are required for DS0 signal interconnections in the CO.

• External clock sources must be duplicated (two inputs are required).

• The framing format (ESF or SF) and the line code (B8ZS or ZCS) may be selected for DS1 inputs.

The optional ED7C818-34, Group 1, Composite Office/BITS Clock Kit provides a wire-wrap terminal strip and terminating resistors for distribution of external synchronization signals within a bay containing up to four AnyMedia Access System FAST shelves. The kit is recommended for applications of the AnyMedia Access System that use either composite office clock synchronization or DS1 external synchronization. For composite office clock signals, the kit permits two input signals to be multipled to as many as 4 FAST shelves in a bay. DS1 clock signals cannot be multipled. Two individual DS1 synchronization inputs must be provided for each externally-timed FAST shelf in a bay. For both types of external


Synchronization and Timing363-211-128


synchronization, the kit provides test points for fault sectionalization of the external signals.

Timing mode selection

When engineering an installation of the AnyMedia Access System, the operating timing mode must be selected. The preferred selection is determined by the system application and by the availability of reliable synchronization sources. The following considerations apply:

• For remote terminal applications that are served by metallic DS1 feeder or by an asynchronous multiplexer, the line-timed mode is appropriate.

• For remote terminal applications that are served by SONET facilities, the line-timed mode is also applicable; however, the SONET facilities and the SONET payload must share traceable synchronization sources to prevent periodic VT1.5 pointer adjustments and consequent synchronization hits. Alternatively, the external DS1 timing mode can be used in SONET-fed RT configurations. The necessary DS1 clock signal inputs to the FAST shelf can be provided by most SONET multiplexers. Depending upon the number of network elements at the remote site, it may be necessary to provide additional equipment to source multiple DS1 clock signals.

• For COT applications, the external timing mode is preferred, however the free-running mode can be used when only voice-frequency subscriber services are provided.

Free-running mode The AnyMedia Access System also supports a free-running synchronization mode that can be selected via a TL1 command. For free-running operation, the system derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator with an accuracy of ±32 ppm. The free-running mode is intended only for system turn-up, however, the free-running mode can be used when only voice-frequency subscriber services are provided. The free-running oscillator also provides a backup timing signal for system operation during synchronization input failures.

Timing considerations for SONET applications

In many applications of the AnyMedia Access System, the telephony payload will be transported by a SONET subnetwork. It is important that the DS1 payload and the SONET transport system share synchronization traceable to a PRS. Generally, this will be the case in a well-designed modern network. If the SONET system and the feeder DS1s do not share traceable synchronization sources, then VT1.5 pointer adjustments may produce repetitive phase hits on the carried DS1s. Although the AnyMedia Access System is designed to maintain synchronization lock in the presence of VT1.5 phase hits, this condition should be avoided.


363-211-128Synchronization and TimingTraditional DLC Interfaces

Synchronization example

Figure Figure 6-14 on page 6-49 shows the typical configuration for a COT FAST shelf. The composite clock input is used for timing DDS and ISDN BRITE services. Timing from a composite clock also is useful in scenarios where the RT interfaces with multiple COTs, digital switches, and/or interoffice equipment. A free-running mode is provided by the COT for applications where the RT can accept a stratum 4 input.

Figure 6-14. Typical Synchronization Network for the COT FAST Shelf

MDS2 shelf timing The MDSUs utilize the same timing signals as the narrowband APs. A single 8 MHz clock and 8 kHz sync are supplied by an MDSU to an MCS in the MDS2 shelf for timing the MDS2 link. Side selection of the clock and sync from the COMDACs is performed by the MDSU.

The MDS2 shelf must be supplied with duplicated composite clock inputs when it is to be equipped with DS0 dataport CUs. Two composite clock signals can be multipled to all FAST shelves and MDS2 shelves in a bay.


Management Interface PC Requirements363-211-128


6Management Interface PC Requirements 6

Overview The Management Interface package is composed of the GSI and the Network Maintenance Manager.

The Management Interface is software that is installed and used on a PC (desktop or laptop) running under the Windows operating system environment. It provides a user friendly way to graphically view and access the AnyMedia Access System to respond to alarms, perform OAM&P functions requiring TL1 messaging, access online customer documentation, and obtain online help.

PC requirements The Management Interface is supported on PCs with the following minimum functionality:

Hardware requirements 6• Computer/processor—486/25 MHz-based system (a Pentium is

recommended)

• Display—256 color VGA or higher resolution display

• Peripheral/miscellaneous—mouse or compatible pointing device

• Local access connection through the following:

— COMDAC: a cable connects from the PC serial port(s) to the system’s CIT port EIA-232E/574 9-pin connector, which is located on the front of the CTU circuit pack (local access is optional, but required for local CIT port access).

— AFM: a cable connects from the PC Ethernet port to the 10BaseT RJ-45 jack on the faceplate of the AFM (see Engineering the LAN Connection on page 6-14).

• Remote access—Ethernet LAN card (optional, but required for LAN connection).

Software requirements 6• Operating system*—Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows

NT Workstation 4.0 or Windows XP Workstation

• Memory—64 MB minimum of RAM for the application software

• Hard disk space—500 MB of available hard disk space

• Communications packages—TCP/IP-32 (for LAN connection only)

* Windows 95/98/2000/NT/XP are copyrights or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation


363-211-128Management Interface PC RequirementsTraditional DLC Interfaces

• Web browsers (for viewing online documentation)—Internet Explorer 5.0 and Netscape Navigator 4.0 or later

• PDF Viewer—Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 comes on the CD-ROM with the online documentation (for viewing the PDF documentation). Adobe Systems distributes this software for free; the user does not need a license.

Settings 6• For laptops, minimum setting recommended: 800x600 with small fonts.

• For PCs, minimum setting recommended: 800x600; highly recommended: 1024x768 or higher with small fonts.

TL1SI view The TL1SI window is available in the GSI by launching a TL1SI view window through the GSI (TL1 command lines can also be entered on any TL1SI without the Management Interface software).

Online documentation

The Management Interface comes with online documentation that the technician is able to access in the following ways:

• Use the browser feature in the GSI’s pull-down Help menu to launch the user’s default Web browser (the online documents are tested on Internet Explorer 5.0 and Navigator 4.0 or later). If the browser home page is set to the document’s path, the online document appears; otherwise, a user can navigate to the document.

• Use the GSI online Help to navigate to the online documentation.

Online help The GSI and Network Maintenance Manager come with a help system that is context sensitive, has a table of contents and an index, and contains a getting started guide on how to use the GSI and the Network Maintenance Manager.



Product Reliability363-211-128


6Product Reliability 6

Compliance with Telcordia Technologies, Inc. reliability standards

The AnyMedia Access System adheres to applicable reliability sections of the following Telcordia Technologies, Inc. standards:

TR-NWT-000057: Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems

TR-NWT-000332: Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment

TR-NWT-000357: Generic Requirements for Assuring the Reliability of Components Used in Telecommunications Systems

TR-NWT-000418: Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic Transport Systems

TA-NWT-000909: Generic Requirements and Objectives for Fiber in the Loop Systems.

Loop access (traditional DLC services)

Loop access reliability is compliant with the availability and maintainability requirements in TR-NWT-000057. The loop access downtime for any individual subscriber line caused by the universal AnyMedia Access System (including the option of an adjunct MDS2 shelf) is expected to be less than the required average of 28 minutes per year (17 minutes per year for the RT FAST shelf and 11 minutes per year for the COT FAST shelf). This corresponds to an availability of 99.99677%.

The line downtime caused by RT FAST shelf hardware failures is expected to be less than the required average of 13 minutes per year, while downtime due to software and procedural errors is expected to be less than 4 minutes per year. The line downtime caused by COT FAST shelf hardware failures are calculated to be 8 minutes per year, while the line downtime due to software and procedural errors is expected to be less than 3 minutes per year.

The high density CUs allow for a consolidation of functionality on the AnyMedia Access System shelf; the total failure in 109 hours (FITs) for the 32 line AP is less than one-half of the total FITs for 8 quad CUs. Similarly, functional consolidation in the common equipment has led to an 80% reduction in the FIT rate of those circuit packs. This design results in a doubling of the mean-time to failure or a 50% reduction in the number of dispatches compared to a system that uses quad CUs. The simplified shelf design has another advantage. The amount of unprotected circuitry associated with a customer line is greatly reduced; the COMDAC and the IODS1 packs are the only other circuits in the transmission path, and they can be protected. The result is a 70% reduction in customer reported troubles compared with a quad CU-based system.

363-211-128COT FAST Shelf PoweringTraditional DLC Interfaces

6COT FAST Shelf Powering 6

Overview Powering for the AnyMedia Access System COT FAST shelf includes engineering for the following:

• Powering options

• Shelf power and distribution

• Ringing

• Ringing filter assembly

• Fusing

• Grounding

• Fan shelf

• Power drain

• ATU.

Powering options The AnyMedia Access System offers different powering choices to fit the needs of a variety of applications, as follows:

• The first powering option offers duplicated power, which maintains power to all slots of the FAST shelf when one of the two power feeder inputs fails. Duplicated power is offered on the J1C282AB-1, L1 shelf via the FCM.

• The second powering option provides direct power, as offered on the J1C282AC-1, L1 shelf via the FCM.

In both powering options, duplicated and direct power are provided via an FCM (there is a different FCM for each) that is replaceable in case of failure.

These shelves are compatible with battery plant supplying input in the range of–42.5V DC to –56.5V DC.

Shelf power distribution

Shelf power distribution of the two –48V inputs to the FAST shelf is dependent on the powering option selected.

FAST shelf with duplicated power via replaceable FCM 6

For a FAST shelf with duplicated powering, the FCM distributes the –48V A and B inputs redundantly to the F1 and F2 power fuses on the shelf side. Should one of the inputs (–48V A or B) fail, both the F1 and F2 fuses and power distribution buses will continue to supply power. As long as one –48V input is present, all shelf slots will remain powered, as shown in Table 6-12.


COT FAST Shelf Powering363-211-128


Note, however, that failure of either one of the F1 or F2 fuses will result in loss of service to half the subscribers. Common packs will remain operational on failure of one fuse due to duplicated powering by both F1 and F2 distribution buses.

FAST shelf with direct power via replaceable FCM 6

For a FAST shelf with direct powering, the FCM distributes the –48V A and B inputs directly into the corresponding F1 and F2 power fuses. The F1 and F2 fuses supply the F1 and F2 distribution buses, as noted in Table 6-13.

If one input (–48V A or B) or an F1 or F2 fuse fails, half the subscribers will lose service. Common packs, however, will remain operational due to the redundancy of the power distribution buses.

Ringing The COT FAST shelf needs a ringing source if the shelf will support CUs or APs that require ringing (e.g., the AUA75 PLAR). The FAST shelf requires a single–20 Hz ringing input. It is expected that the ringing plant would provide redundancy. The COMDAC has a ringing generator detector for the –20 Hz input

Table 6-12. Powering FAST Shelf with Duplicated Power via Replaceable FCM

Input A,B to F1 Input A,B to F2

COMDACs ✓ ✓

CTU ✓ ✓

IODS1 1-5, P ✓ ✓

AP slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 ✓ ✓

AP slots 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16 ✓ ✓

MDSUs in adjacent slots ✓ ✓

Table 6-13. Powering FAST Shelf with Direct Power via Replaceable FCM

Input A to F1 Input B to F2

COMDACs ✓ ✓

CTU ✓ ✓

IODS1 1-5, P ✓ ✓

AP slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 ✓

AP slots 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16 ✓

MDSUs in adjacent slots ✓ ✓



signal. The ringing generator detector can be disabled at the COT with the SET-RINGGEN TL1 command.

Ringing filter assembly

A ringing filter assembly (ED7C837-30, Group 1) is available to protect the ringing lines from lightning. This protection is required in all COT applications for which the ringing source is not mounted in the same or adjacent bay as the FAST shelf, or if the ringing source can provide more than 104 Vrms (such as is found in some adjustable ringing supplies).

Fusing on FAST shelf with replaceable FCMs (duplicated and direct power)

The FAST shelf has five fuses, two test points for power inputs to the shelf, and five test points on the shelf (distribution) side of the fuses, as shown in Figure 6-15. The A and B –48V feeders are fused each at 15A, and they feed the F1 and F2 power distribution buses to the FAST shelf. Two 10A fuses feed the–48V M1 and M2 power distribution buses, which power the optional MDS2 shelf, ATU, and the fan shelves. One 1A fuse provides the –20Hz ringing power to the FAST and MDS2 shelves.

The 6A fan shelf contains six fans, and the 6B fan shelf contains two fans. For either shelf, half the fans are fused off each of the two –48V M1 and M2 fuses at the shelf. All fuses at the shelf level are field replaceable fuses. Each AP includes a 0.5A fuse at its –20 Hz ringing input on the pack itself. These AP fuses are not field replaceable. Each fan unit includes an internal fuse that is not field replaceable.

Test points are provided on the FCM for the –48V A and B power inputs to the F1 and F2 fuses and for the distribution side of the FAST shelf. The COMDAC monitors the power distribution buses, ringing feed, MDS2, and fan feeds, and raises an alarm on failures of the power or opening of the fuses. On the FAST shelf with replaceable FCM, it is strongly recommended that the –48V A and B alarm inputs to the FAST shelf be wired to the CTU miscellaneous contacts for the reporting of –48V input alarms.


COT FAST Shelf Powering363-211-128


Figure 6-15. FAST Shelf Fusing and Test Points with Replaceable FCMs (Duplicated and Direct Power)

Grounding The FAST shelf supports operation in an integrated (mesh) ground plane environment. Single point (isolated ground plane) grounding is not supported. During installation, the presence of two factory-installed mesh ground straps on the FAST shelf backplane should be verified.

The FAST shelf supports separate power plants in the integrated ground plane mode only.

Ringing voltage return is not grounded at the shelf; rather, it should be connected to the CO ground system at the source.

Clips are located on the left and right side of the shelf assembly for an ESD wrist strap connection. This makes a good connection to the bay frame ground through the shelf metalwork. An additional wrist strap ground jack at the rear of the shelf is also provided.



Fan shelf power from FAST shelves with replaceable FCMs

On FAST shelves powered with a replaceable FCM, power for associated equipment is derived from the –48V M1 and M2 power distribution feeds on the FAST shelves. Two 10A fuses are located on the FCM, which supply power to the fan shelves, MDS2 shelf, and ATU. The fan shelf contains six fans, with half wired to each fuse. In the case of a single power feed input failure, half the fans will continue to operate. Fan and fan fuse failures generate a fan alarm. The internal fan fuses are not field replaceable.

• For -AB and -AC shelves, 10A M1 and M2 fuses feed fans, MDS2, and/or ATU (M1 fuse only).

• For -AB shelf, loss of one feeder (A or B) will not affect service.

• For -AC shelf, loss of one feeder cause one half of MDS2 and three out six fans to lose power. Loss of A feeder means loss of power to ATU.

• For both -AB and -AC shelves, failed M1 or M2 fuse causes one-half of the MDS2 and three out of six fans to lose power. Loss of the M1 fuse results in loss of power to the ATU.

Power drain For more power drain information, refer to Appendix A, Floor Plan Data Sheets.

ATU The 1A ATU shelf obtains the power voltage from its associated J1C282AB-1 or J1C282AC-1 FAST shelf. The J1C282AB-1 or J1C282AC-1 FAST shelves provide power from their FCM to the ATU shelf sharing the power cable to the optional MDS2 shelf. For detailed fuse and power information for the ATU, see Fan shelf power from FAST shelves with replaceable FCMs on page 6-57.


COT Testing363-211-128


6COT Testing 6

Overview The COT FAST shelf supports the following types of subscriber circuit testing:

• Local metallic test access via jacks on the CTU (or the test points on the MDS2, if an MDS2 is used)

• TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) channel and RT drop testing via the 28 lead PGTC interface that is provided for the COT FAST shelf using the ATU.

Local test access Local test access is available from jacks on the CTU faceplate (or the test points on the MDS2, if an MDS2 is used at the COT). The type of access available (none, bridging, half split, or full split) depends on the test access relays (if any) that are installed on the AP to be tested and on the type of CTU being used. More information on the local test access capabilities may be found in Local test access (under Fault Management - Testing) in Chapter 8 of the APOG.

TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) channel and RT drop testing

The PGTC testing hardware installed in the CO provides an interface between universal DLC systems and a TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) locally-switched services test operation system (TOS), such as Tollgrade’s LoopCare system (formerly called the Mechanized Loop Testing system). Both the digital channel between the COT and RT (including the port circuitry in the RT and COT APs) and the subscriber drop can be tested. The PGTC tests the universal carrier system channel and sets up metallic access so that the TOS can test the subscriber drop beyond the remote terminal. Note that TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) channel and RT drop testing is applicable only to locally-switched services provided from TR-08 VCOTs and not to services provided from INA VBs or MDS2. The TOS does drop testing on the loop using a remote test unit, which may be either an RTU-1 located in the same central office as the COT or an RTU-2 collocated with the RT. The RTU-1 or RTU-2 is controlled by the TOS. (For MLT, the RTU-1 can be either the LTS or the LTF.)

The PGTC connects to the 1A ATU with a 28 lead bus. This 28-lead interface provides the ATU with access to four tester units from the PGTC plus their associated control signals. In order to share these tester units among multiple COT FAST shelves (or other universal DLC systems), the 28-lead PGTC cable may be connected to multiple ATUs (or the equivalent hardware for other carrier systems) in a daisy-chain type of arrangement where the output of one system is connected to the input of the next system. The COMDAC in the COT FAST shelf will coordinate test setup and tear-down with the PGTC interface via control signals sent and received over the ATU data link.

In addition to the 28-lead PGTC interface, the ATU provides interfaces to eight metallic bypass pairs. Each of these eight test pair interfaces has an associated Inhibit lead that is used to assert that a particular test pair is in use in order to


363-211-128COT TestingTraditional DLC Interfaces

avoid possible contention with test requests from other test systems sharing the same test pair. The Tip, Ring and Inhibit leads from all eight bypass pairs on the ATU are connected to a distributing frame, along with the Tip, Ring and Inhibit leads from other universal DLC systems in that CO. Whenever it is desired to share a metallic bypass pair (or digital bypass pair) among more than one DLC system, the Tip and Ring leads from all of these systems are multipled together and connected to the metallic bypass pair (or digital bypass pair) that is to be shared. Similarly, the Inhibit leads corresponding to these Tips and Rings are multipled together. The ATU (as well as the COTs from other DLC systems in the CO) normally applies -48 volt central office battery to each inhibit lead. Whenever an ATU (or other COT in the CO) wishes to use a bypass pair, it grounds the Inhibit lead associated to this test pair. The presence of this ground tells the other systems sharing the same test pair that this test pair is in use.

A TL1 command (SET-DCTP) provides a mapping between each of the VCOTs in an COT FAST shelf and one of the eight bypass pair interfaces (plus its corresponding Inhibit lead) on the ATU. The bypass pair interfaces from the ATUs serving different COT FAST shelves may be cross-connected at the distributing frame to the same or different metallic bypass pairs (or digital bypass pairs) depending on anticipated testing traffic and whether or not the RT shelves corresponding to these COTs are collocated. A metallic bypass pair, digital bypass pair, or RTU-2 for DLC systems is normally shared among a number of subscriber lines. (For example, the LoopCare guideline is that no more than 1000 subscriber lines should share a test pair. This number corresponds to approximately two fully-loaded COT FAST shelves.)

The alternatives for providing connectivity between the subscriber drop and the TOS are as follows:

1. Metallic bypass pair

2. Digital bypass pair

3. RTU-2 at the AnyMedia Access System RT site.

The connections to the ATU, the RT and COT FAST shelf channel banks, and the central office testing equipment vary depending on which of these three alternatives is selected. Figure 6-16 illustrates TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) channel and RT drop testing in the universal configuration when either a metallic bypass pair or an digital bypass pair is used. The connections to the metallic bypass pair at the COT and RT shown in this figure can be replaced by connections to a digital bypass pair. The digital bypass pair can be provided by Tollgrade MCU-4496ER digital bypass CUs miscellaneously mounted in Tollgrade Micro-Bank systems at COT and RT ends. Alternatively, if both the RT and COT FAST shelves are equipped with MDS2 shelves, Tollgrade MCU-5405 digital bypass CUs can be installed in these MDS2 shelves. A third test configuration would include an MDS2 at one end of the link and a Micro-Bank at the other.




Figure 6-16. PGTC Testing of FAST Shelf Lines on Universal Systems with Metallic Test Pair

Figure 6-17 illustrates channel and RT drop testing in the universal configuration when an RTU-2, which must be compatible with the TOS being employed, is installed at the RT site. Although a bypass pair interface on the ATU must still be assigned to this RT site, no connections are made to the test pair tip/ring leads at the ATU. However the Inhibit lead that corresponds to this assigned bypass pair is multipled with the Inhibit leads from any other carrier systems that share this same RTU-2. The RTU-2 requires two locally-switched (or nailed up) VF channels, which can be obtained from any carrier system installed at that same RT site. One channel is used to carry the modem data between the TOS and the RTU-2 that is used to command the RTU-2 to run its various tests. The second VF channel is used as a talk/monitor link for verifying an idle subscriber line and for speaking with the subscriber.

The PGTC is wired into the test trunk path between the CO-based test head (i.e., the RTU-1) and the NTT circuits at the local switch. In the idle condition (no tests in progress), the PGTC provides a direct connection between the RTU-1 and the switch NTT. When the TOS sends a request to test a line on a universal AnyMedia Access System by applying approximately +116 VDC to the Tip lead of the subscriber line to be tested, the COT CU responds by sending a 333.3 Hz tone toward the PGTC; receipt of this tone activates the PGTC. The AnyMedia Access System and the PGTC cooperate in a complicated series of interactions specified in TR-465 to set up the metallic test access network that allows testing of the channel and RT drop of the subscriber line served by the universal AnyMedia Access System. For the metallic bypass pair or digital bypass pair configuration shown in Figure 6-16, the PGTC connects the test trunk from the RTU-1 to the metallic bypass pair (or digital bypass pair). This bypass pair connects to the subscriber drop beyond the RT via relays in the CTU and in the AP. Once connected, the RTU-1 performs drop tests, and the PGTC performs the channel test.



For the RTU-2 configuration shown in Figure 6-17, test access and channel testing are set up in exactly the same manner as with a metallic bypass pair. However, the drop tests are performed by the RTU-2 at the RT site in response to messages sent from the TOS over the control channel.

After the testing is completed, the TOS requests the result of the channel test from the PGTC, which in turn presents the results to the RTU-1 as voltages.

The PGTC can provide access to and perform channel testing on four channels at a time, as long as each channel is in a different system and each system has a different bypass pair (or RTU-2). A detailed description of the PGTC is provided in Lucent Technical Practices 363-202-300.

Figure 6-17. PGTC Testing of FAST Shelf Lines on Universal Systems with RTU-2

Digital bypass pair (universal)

As an alternative to a metallic bypass pair connected from the CO to the AnyMedia Access System site, you may use a digital bypass pair that is derived using Tollgrade CUs. The tip/ring pairs of digital bypass pair CUs at the AnyMedia Access System and CO ends of the carrier system allow the same tests to be performed as the tests performed over a metallic pair, but without requiring an actual metallic pair between the AnyMedia Access System site and the CO.




Tollgrade Communications, Inc. manufactures such digital bypass pair CUs and also makes several channel banks* such as stand-alone Micro-Bank systems that can be used to house these CUs at an AnyMedia Access System RT site and/or in the CO. Tollgrade digital bypass pair CUs provide the following features:

• Elimination of the need for either a metallic bypass pair or an RTU-2 at the RT site for subscriber drop testing

• Transmission performance that is compatible with LoopCare drop testing

• The speed and accuracy of typical good-quality metallic bypass pair with the following improvements:

— Greater operating range (up to approximately 100 miles)— Elimination of inductive interference, ground potential problems, and

other environmental conditions.

• Synchronous dataport type CUs that include an adaptive differential PCM voice channel.

The following three Tollgrade digital bypass pair CUs can be used, depending on the application and equipment configuration:

• MCU-4496 CU

• MCU-4496ER extended range CU

• MCU-5405 CU.

The first two are used in Tollgrade Micro-Bank systems, Tollgrade Slash-2400 channel banks, SLC 96 system COTs, or D4 channel banks; the third is used in SLC-2000 system COTs or in an MDS2 shelf associated with an AnyMedia Access System COT or RT.

All digital bypass pair CUs require two DS0 timeslots on a feeder facility for operation and must be handled as nonswitched special service circuits. The sequence and specific timeslots used on the feeder facility are governed by the type of equipment used. The feeder facility timeslots used for the SLC 96 system COTs or D4 type channel banks, Tollgrade Micro-Banks, or Tollgrade Slash-2400 banks are governed by the slot used to hold the CU. For all of these applications, except the Tollgrade Micro-Bank, two consecutive timeslots are required. The timeslots used for a Tollgrade ADD/DROP Micro-Bank or SLC-2000 system COT are provisionable, but it is recommended that two consecutive timeslots be used for these applications. In D4 type banks, the slot to the right of the Tollgrade CU must be empty and should have a blank faceplate CU to prevent a user from accidentally inserting a CU in the vacant slot, as this would disrupt service on the Tollgrade CU. The two digital bypass pair time slots from the AnyMedia Access

* Tollgrade Communications, Inc. makes different bank types (Micro-Bank, ADD/DROP Micro-Bank, SLASH-2400 bank) to house their digital bypass pair CUs.



System RT site digital bypass pair CU must be connected at the CO end to a digital bypass pair CU.

Other digital bypass pair configurations

A means for providing a digital bypass pair facility uses the INA capability of the COT and a Micro-Bank equipped with an MCU-4496 Digital Bypass Unit at the RT site. This configuration would be appropriate where the use of an MDS2 at the RT is not justified. Figure 6-18 illustrates this application. Note that the derived digital bypass pair is shared by both the COT and associated PGTC, as well as the TBCU facility of the LDS.

Figure 6-18. Using an AnyMedia COT in an INA Configuration to Provide a Digital Bypass Pair

At the RT site, a Tollgrade MCU-4496 or MCU-4496ER CU may be housed in a Micro-Bank system. Alternatively, a Tollgrade MCU-5405 CU may be installed in the MDS2 shelf. At the CO site, the digital bypass pair CU may be housed in a Tollgrade Micro-Bank system, a Tollgrade Slash-2400 channel bank, a D4 channel bank, SLC 96 system COT, or a SLC-2000 COT terminating an INA or TR-08 digroup. Figure 6-19 illustrates the configuration when Micro-Bank systems are used at both the RT and the CO sites. Figure 6-20 illustrates the following configuration:

• The MCU-5405 CU is installed in the MDS2 shelf

• An MDS2 shelf, a SLC-2000 COT, a D bank, a Tollgrade Slash-2400 channel bank, or a Tollgrade Micro-Bank is used to house the Tollgrade CU at the CO site.




The D bank and Tollgrade Micro-Bank terminate an INA digroup. The SLC-2000 COT can terminate either an INA or a TR-08 digroup to transport the timeslots used for the Tollgrade CUs. The SLC 96 terminates a TR-08 digroup.

The same equipment arrangement shown in Figure 6-16 on page 6-60 for universal system testing with a metallic test pair is used with a digital bypass pair, except that the TAP-B connections of the AnyMedia Access System RT and the COT to a metallic test pair are replaced by connections to digital bypass pair CUs at the RT site and the COT site, respectively, as shown in Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20. The same multiplexer or metallic DS1 facilities that are used to transport the DS1 feeders from the AnyMedia Access System banks to the CO can be used to transport the DS1 that interconnects the AnyMedia Access System site Micro-Bank system with the CO entity (Micro-Bank system, Tollgrade Slash-2400, D4 channel bank, SLC 96 COT, or SLC-2000 COT) that houses the digital bypass pair CU. Furthermore, the interactions of the AnyMedia Access System with the PGTC and TOS are identical to those discussed above for a metallic test pair.

Figure 6-19. TR-465-Compatible (PGTC-Type) Circuit Testing Using Tollgrade Micro-Bank Systems



Figure 6-20. TR-465-Compatible (PGTC-Type) Circuit Testing with Tollgrade MCU-5405 CU in an RT MDS2 Shelf

RTU-2 at AnyMedia Access System site (universal configuration)

Instead of using a bypass pair, as shown in Figure 6-16 on page 6-60, Figure 6-19, and Figure 6-20, the AnyMedia Access System RT site can be equipped with an external TR-465-compatible (PGTC-type) RTU-2 (such as a Tollgrade DMU, a Lucent/Tau-Tron Model 7000 NGRTH test head*, or a 4TEL RMU) to do the drop testing. The RTU-2 is connected to the metallic test pair input at the AnyMedia Access System (TAP-B). This RTU-2 also must be connected to two VF channels on AnyMedia Access System APs, which are used as follows:

• One channel as a data communications path

• A second channel as a talk/monitor path.

Figure 6-21 shows the RTU-2 configuration. In this configuration, the locally switched services TOS (e.g., LoopCare) sets up the test using the PGTC in the same way as it does for the bypass pair configuration. In addition, the TOS calls up the RTU-2 over either a dial-up or a nailed-up data communications path through an assigned VF channel in the AnyMedia Access System. The RTU-2 performs the drop tests; the PGTC performs the channel test. At the end of these

* The Lucent/Tau-Tron Model 7000 NGRTH test head can also be used as a special service RTU-2 (see AnyMedia® Access System, Applications, Planning and Ordering Guide, GR-834-Compatible On-Demand Circuit Testing).




tests, the TOS can request the results of the channel test from the PGTC. PGTC presents these results as voltages to the CO test head (i.e., the RTU-1). Examples of a CO test head are the LTS or LTF.

Figure 6-21. Typical Connections of a TR-465-Compatible (PGTC-Type) Locally Switched Services RTU-2 to an AnyMedia Access System

To configure an RTU-2 for access to the AnyMedia Access System, two AP VF port circuits that terminate on either the protector block assembly or a distribution frame must be designated for use with the external RTU-2. The drop side of these port circuits must be wired to the RTU-2 at the AnyMedia Access System site, according to the RTU-2 vendor-specific procedures. Once wired, it is necessary to make T0 cross-connections between the port circuits wired to the RTU-2 control and talk/monitor paths and two logical lines on a TR-08 VRT. It also will be necessary to provision the T0 ports for logical lines on a TR-08 VRT. This can be done either with a TL1 command from a local or remote terminal or from a provisioning OS, such as Telcordia’s OPS/INE or TransPort Element Activation Manager. Further details on the specific GSI or TL1 command format and parameters can be found in the online document titled Commands and Procedures.



363-211-128OrderingTraditional DLC Interfaces

6Ordering 6

All ordering information is now located in the AnyMedia® Access System, Ordering Guide, code 363-211-125. Ordering information has been moved to a separate document to facilitate updating the information.

Engineering Work Order363-211-128


6Engineering Work Order 6

Overview This section contains an example of an Engineering Work Order that can be used by a technician to complete initial turn-up of an AnyMedia Access System COT FAST shelf.

This template has been designed to follow the flow of inputs required in the turn-up procedures for the COT FAST shelf in the AnyMedia® Access System, Commands & Procedures. The template contains a sample of parameter inputs and can be modified as needed to suit individual applications.

Work Order information to support equipment installation

The Work Order is divided into the following six parts:

• Part 1, Preliminary Information, covers general information about the system

• Part 2, Physical Installation (Bay), covers information about physical installation

• Part 3, Turn-Up, identifies the details for all applicable turn-up procedures

• Part 4, System Activation Procedures, identifies the details for all applicable system activation procedures

• Part 5, Operation Procedures, identifies the details for all applicable operation procedures

• Part 6, Apparatus Codes, lists the apparatus codes for all APs and circuit packs.

The engineer should fill in Part 1, Preliminary Information, of the Work Order.

Following is a list of the key items that are needed for Part 1 and Part 2, Physical Installation (Bay), of the Work Order:

• Bay location

• Bay size

• Position number in the bay (1, 2, 3, etc.)

• Line testing requirements

• Alignment pin and flange hole mounting positions

• Identification of the cables to be installed and not installed for the particular application.


363-211-128Part 1 — Preliminary InformationTraditional DLC Interfaces

AnyMedia Engineering Work Order for COT

Part 1 — Preliminary Information 6

Type of System: _____________________________________________________Software Version:_______________________ GSI Release: __________________Location: Bay ___________________________ Shelf________________________Address:____________________________________________________________

Number of Subtending RT Sites (1-8) ____________________(for each, identify the site location)

Location: Bay ______________________________ Shelf _________________________________Address:__________________________________ Location Code: _________________________








Network Element Type = COT

Type of Installation = CO Bay

Bay Height: 7 Feet 9 feet 11.5 feet

Cooling = Forced Convection

Miscellaneous Fan Alarm (specify location on misc. pair panel)_________________________

Grounding = Mesh Ground


Part 1 — Preliminary Information363-211-128


TU-285a COT

TU-285b; TU-285c COT

Testing Type (check one)

MLT (Mechanized Loop Testing) IMLT (Integrated MLT) LTD (Local Test Desk) Other (specify)_________________

Testing Capability

PGTC (TR-465)

Alarm Test Unit (ATU) (specify Bay and Shelf location)

Location Bay_____________ Shelf_____________

Bypass Pair Type ( ✓ ) (up to 8 pairs required)

Specify Cable & Pair Number RT Location Code

Metallic Bypass Pair ____________________________ ____________________________








Bypass Pair Type ( ✓ ) (up to 8 required)

RT Location Code

Digital Bypass Pair ____________________________

____________________________

____________________________

____________________________

____________________________

____________________________

____________________________

____________________________


363-211-128Part 1 — Preliminary InformationTraditional DLC Interfaces

If Digital Bypass Pair (If additional Bypass Pairs need to be listed, please copy this blank form)

at the COT:

• Micro-Bank equipped with MCU-4496ER

Micro-Bank Shelf Location: ____________________ Slot Location: ________________ Assigned Cable Pair at CO ________________

OR

• MDS2 Slot equipped with MCU-5405

Shelf Location: _____________________________ Slot Location: ________________ Assigned Cable Pair at CO ________________

at the RT:

• Micro-Bank equipped with MCU-4496ER

Micro-Bank Shelf Location: ____________________ Slot Location: ________________ Assigned Cable Pair at CO ________________

OR

• MDS2 Slot equipped with MCU-5405

Shelf Location: _____________________________ Slot Location: ________________ Assigned Cable Pair at CO ________________


Part 2 — Physical Installation (Bay)363-211-128


Part 2 — Physical Installation (Bay) 6

List of Cables to be Installed

Mark the cables needed with the letter Y and the cables not needed with the letter N. The cables marked with an X are never needed.

Equipment (✓) Bay Hole Number* Equipment (✓) Bay Hole Number*

FAST #1 MDS2 #1

FAST #2 MDS2 #2

FAST #3 Baffle #1

FAST #4 Baffle #2

FAST #5

Fan #1 ATU #1

Fan #2 ATU #2

Fan #3 ATU #3

Fan #4 ATU #4

Fan #5 ATU #5

* NOTE: Check all that are needed. See the Installation Manual for the hole number in the bay in which the lowest hole in each equipment’s flange is located.

CableFASTShelf

MDS2Shelf

Alarm Test Unit

Power

Ringing X

VF X

DS1 X X

Office Alarm X

Miscellaneous Alarm X

E&M X X

TAP X

Office Clock X

LAN X X

Data Link

Telemetry X

PGTC X

DC Test Pair X X


363-211-128Part 3 — Turn-Up ProceduresTraditional DLC Interfaces

Part 3 — Turn-Up Procedures 6

COMDAC Installation TU-110 COT

CTU Installation TU-120a COT; TU-120b COT

Verify COMDAC Software TU-130 COT

Restoring NVDS Provisioning Memory to the Factory Defaults TU-140a COT; TU-140b COT

Provision COT Default NVDS TU-145 COT

COMDAC in COM-1 Slot COMDAC in COM-2 Slot

LAN Serial Port ASCII

• Host IP Address ______________________________________________

• Baud Rate 19200 Other __________________________

• User ID default Other __________________________

• Password default Other __________________________

• Software Version ____________________________________________

Default NVDSS Manual

• Host IP Address ______________________________________________

• Baud Rate 19200 Other __________________________

• User ID default Other __________________________

• Password default Other __________________________

• Set COT Script

• Default script

• cot_R_1_2_3_both_mds2.txt • cot_R_1_2_3_extraProv.txt

• cot_R_1_2_3_crs_T1_set_attr.txt • cot_R_1_2_3_half_mds2.txt

• cot_R_1_2_3_crs_T1T0_ent_T0.txt • cot_R_1_2_3_no_mds2.txt


Part 3 — Turn-Up Procedures363-211-128


Setting Source ID - SET-SID TU-150 COT

Alarm Assignment & Administration - ENT-OSACMAP and ENT-MSGMAP TU-170 COT

• Source ID (SID) System00 (Default) Other ___________________________

• VC Assignment for ENT-OSACMAP

ACID SNPA

TL1MAINTENANCE vc-1 vc-2 vc-3 vc-4

TL1MEMORYADMIN vc-1 vc-2 vc-3 vc-4

TL1OTHER1 vc-1 vc-2 vc-3 vc-4

TL1TEST vc-1 vc-2 vc-3 vc-4

• OS Message Mapping for ENT-MSGMAP ACTION (✓)

• INTID ______________________ • MSGTYPE________________ DISABLED ENABLED









Alarm Assignment and Administration - SET-ATTR-ENV (contd) TU-170 COT

Setting IP Address - SET-IP TU-180 COT

• Alarm Assignment for SET-ATTR-ENV

NTFCNCDE (✓)

AID Entity P1 P2 CR MJ MN ALMTYPE ALMMSG

• mc-1-(1-8) mc-1- ________ NA ______________ _______________________

mc-1- ________ NA ______________ _______________________

mc-1- ________ NA ______________ _______________________

• v08-(1-20) v08 ________ NA ______________ _______________________

v08 ________ NA ______________ _______________________

v08 ________ NA ______________ _______________________

• ucmisc-(1-5)-(1-20) ucmisc ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

ucmisc ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

ucmisc ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

• atucc-(1-42) atucc* ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

atucc* ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

atuc*c ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

• ctucc-(1-2) ctucc ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

ctucc ________ ________ ______________ _______________________

• IP Address for SET-IP

AID Entity P1 INSTATE (✓) IP Address SUBMASK REMIP

cit-1 cit 1 Down_____ Up _______ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________

eth-1 eth 1 Down_____ Up _______ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________

roc-1 roc 1 Down_____ Up _______ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________




IODS1 Nonprotection & Protection Installation TU-190 COT; TU-200 COT

• IO-1 • IO-4

• IO-2 • IO-5

• IO-3 • IO-6 (IODS1 protection)

• IODS1 for ED-T1

AID1 (ds1’s) EQLZ LINECDE FMT DGTH PPST

0 -655 B8ZS ZCS ESF SF 4 5 6 7 IS OOS

ds1-1-1-1 __________

ds1-1-1-2 __________

ds1-1-1-3 __________

ds1-1-1-4 __________

ds1-1-2-1 __________

ds1-1-2-2 __________

ds1-1-2-3 __________

ds1-1-2-4 __________

ds1-1-3-1 __________

ds1-1-3-2 __________

ds1-1-3-3 __________

ds1-1-3-4 __________

ds1-1-4-1 __________

ds1-1-4-2 __________

ds1-1-4-3 __________

ds1-1-4-4 __________

ds1-1-5-1 __________

ds1-1-5-2 __________

ds1-1-5-3 __________

ds1-1-5-4 __________



Setting Synchronization Parameters - SET-SYNCH TU-210 COT

Provision DC Test Pair for COT FAST Shelf TU-215 COT

• Synchronization Parameters for SET-SYNC

SYNCMODE LINECDE FMT

• EXT1544 • B8ZS • ZCS • ESF • SF

• EXT64

• FRNG

• Set for SET-DCTP

Entity P1 DCTP Entity P1 DCTP

• v08- all

• v08- 1 ____________ • v08- 11 ____________

• v08- 2 ____________ • v08- 12 ____________

• v01- 3 ____________ • v08- 13 ____________

• v08- 4 ____________ • v08- 14 ____________

• v08- 5 ____________ • v08- 15 ____________

• v08- 6 ____________ • v08- 16 ____________

• v08- 7 ____________ • v08- 17 ____________

• v08- 8 ____________ • v08- 18 ____________

• v08- 9 ____________ • v08- 19 ____________

• v08- 10 ____________ • v08- 20 ____________

• uc- all

• uc- 1 ____________

• uc- 2 ____________

• uc- 3 ____________

• uc- 4 ____________

• uc- 5 ____________




AP Installation / Growth TU-220 COT

Presets, Manual Provisioning, or Scripts TU-240 COT

• Install APs (see Table on page 1 for Apparatus Codes)

AP SLOT # AP TYPE AP SLOT # AP TYPE

1 ________ 9 ________

2 ________ 10 ________

3 ________ 11 ________

4 ________ 12 ________

5 ________ 13 ________

6 ________ 14 ________

7 ________ 15 ________

8 ________ 16 ________

• Configuration Choices

• 5 TR-08VCOTS (preset)(TU-250 COT)

• Create VCOTS (manually)(TU-260 COT)

• Single UC VCOT (preset)(TU-250 COT)

• Create VCOTS (manually)(TU-260 COT)

• Create a script(TU-270 COT)

• Run a script(TU-280 COT)



Manual Provisioning TU-260 COT

• T1 Cross Connects for ENT-CRS-T1 (choose one AID2 for each AID1)

AID1 (ds1’s) AID2

P1 P2 P1 P1 P2

ds1-1-1-1 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-1-2 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-1-3 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-1-4 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-2-1 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-2-2 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-2-3 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-2-4 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-3-1 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-3-2 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-3-3 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-3-4 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-4-1 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-4-2 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-4-3 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-4-4 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-5-1 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-5-2 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-5-3 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______

ds1-1-5-4 v8fdr-_______ - _______ ina- _______ ucfdr-_______ - _______




ROC

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

Manual Provisioning (contd) TU-260 COT

• T0 Cross Connects for ENT-CRS-T0 (CCT = 2WAY)

AID1 (virtual) AID2 (physical)

inads0- _____ - _____ OR v8dp- _____ - _____ OR ucdp- _____ - _____ drop-1- _______ - _______ OR m2drop- _____-1- ______

inads0- _____ - _____ v8dp- _____ - _____ ucdp- _____ - _____ drop-1- _______ - _______ m2drop- _____-1- ______























* for more T0 cross-connects, please copy blank form above



T=RDLDed line)

Manual Provisioning (contd) TU-260 COT

Assign or Reassign the MDSU Slot Position in FAST Shelf TU-700 COT; TU-705 COT

• T0 Parameters for ENT-T0

AID1CLEI

(0-10 character string) GSFNSS

(r

inads0- _____ - _____ OR v8dp- _____ - _____ OR ucdp- _____ - _____ __________________________ DFLT-2 or2FXO

inads0- _____ - _____ v8dp- _____ - _____ ucdp- _____ - _____ __________________________ DFLT-2 or2FXO










inads0- _____ - _____ v8dp- _____ - _____ ucdp- _____ - _____ __________________________ DFLT-2or2FXO

* for more T0 parameters, please copy blank form above

• MDSU Slot Placement for SET-MDS2

Left MDSU Right MDSU

• MDSU in AP Slots #14 and #15 • Other __________________ __________________




Channel Unit Insertion / Growth TU-710 COT; TU-720 COT; TU-730 COT

• MDS2 Shelf Required Packs and Location (check all that apply) (refer to Function / Apparatus Code Table on last page)

Slot Option Switch Settings

CU1__________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU2 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU3 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU4 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU5 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU6 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU7 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU8 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU9 __________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU10 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU11 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU12 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU13 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU14 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU15 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU16 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU17 ________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU18 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU19 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU20 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU21 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU22 _________________ __________________________________________________________

CU23 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

CU24 _________________ ___________________________________________________________

MSC-1 (MSC)_______________

MSC-2 (MSC)_______________

PTU-1 (PTU)_______________

PTU-2 (PTU)_______________



COMDAC Reconfiguration - Simplex to Duplex TU-410 COT

Remove a DS1 Feeder IODS1 TU-430 COT; TU-435 COT

AP Degrowth TU-440 COT

• Conversion from Simplex to Duplex

Insert COMDAC in COM-1 Slot

Insert COMDAC in COM-2 Slot

• Remove IODS1 Pack for ED-CONFIG

When removing... ...then run this command

IO-1 ED-CONFIG::IODS1-1:::NR;





IO-P ED-CONFIG::IODS1-P:::NR;

• Remove AP Pack for ED-CONFIG

When removing... ...then run this command When removing... ...then run this command

AP-1 ED-CONFIG:AP-1-1:::NR; AP-9 ED-CONFIG:AP-1-9:::NR;











MDS2 Shelf Degrowth TU-760 COT

• MDS2 Shelf Degrowth

• Remove CU-1 • Remove CU-13













• Remove MSU-1 Slot # ________

• Remove MSU-2 Slot # ________


• Remove MSC-1 ED-CONFIG::MSC-1-1:::NR;

• Remove MSC-2 ED-CONFIG::MSC-1-2:::NR;


• Remove PTU-1 ED-CONFIG::PTU-1-1:::NR;

• Remove PTU-2 ED-CONFIG::PTU-1-2:::NR;


363-211-128Part 4 — System Activation Procedures (SAs)Traditional DLC Interfaces

Part 4 — System Activation Procedures (SAs) 6

Activate Loop Start / Ground Start for TR-08 or UC VT- ENT-CRS-T0 / ENT-T0 SA-140

Activate Coin Service for TR-08 or UC VT- ENT-CRS-T0 / ENT-T0 SA-160

Activate Special Service for TR-08 and INA VB - ENT-CRS-T0 / ENT-T0 SA-180

AP or CU Slot # Pack TypeEquipped

(✓)Add (✓)

___________________________ _________________________

AID1 AID2

inads0 - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

v8dp - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

ucdp - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

(Optional) CLEI # SPEC_BLOCK RDLD (✓)

______________________________________________________ _______________________________


(✓)Add(✓)

___________________________ _________________________

AID1 AID2

inads0 - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

v8dp - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

ucdp - ___________ - ___________ drop - 1 - ___________ - ___________

(Optional) CLEI #

______________________________________________________


(✓)Add(✓)

___________________________ _________________________

AID1 AID2

v8dp - ________ - ________ drop - 1 - ________ - ________

OR ORinads0 - ________ - ________ m2drop - 1 - ________ - ________

(Optional) CLEI # SPEC_BLOCK RDLD (✓)

______________________________________________________ _______________________________


Part 5 — Operation Procedures (OPs)363-211-128


Part 5 — Operation Procedures (OPs) 6

System Access via GSI OP-110a; OP-110b; OP-145; OP-150

Establishing the Remote Operations Channel (ROC) OP-140

Host IP AddressUser ID

(if other than default)Password

(if other than default)

__________________________ _________________________

_________________________

IP Address Submask IP DEFROUTER IP Timeslot

__________________________ _________________________ __________________________ _________________________

ENT-T0

AID GSFN CLEI

inads0- _______ _______ OR v8dp- _______ _______ OR ucdp- _______ _______ 4DO ___________________________________

inads0- _______ _______ v8dp- _______ _______ ucdp- _______ _______ 4DO ___________________________________

inads0- _______ _______ v8dp- _______ _______ ucdp- _______ _______ 4DO ___________________________________

inads0- _______ _______ v8dp- _______ _______ ucdp- _______ _______ 4DO ___________________________________

inads0- _______ _______ v8dp- _______ _______ ucdp- _______ _______ 4DO ___________________________________

ENT-CRS-T0

Logical AID Physical AID CCT

inads0- _______ _______ OR v8dp- _______ _______ OR ucdp- _______ _______ roc-_______ 2WAY

inads0- _______ _______ v8dp- _______ _______ ucdp- _______ _______ roc-_______ 2WAY




• Member Assignment

View Number Field Value

18.15 16 __________________________ (any non-customer drop)

7 MEMBER __________________________ (# of members in trunk group)

12 OE __________________________ (# of originating equipment)

Provisioning the Router

IP Address Submask IP LINECODE

(✓) (✓)

__________________________ _________________________ b8zs OR ami


363-211-128Part 5 — Operation Procedures (OPs)Traditional DLC Interfaces

Exit TELNET Access using a PC OP-160

Initializing PM Registers - (INIT-REG) OP-400

Set/Retrieve Threshold Crossing Alerts - (SET-TH/RTRV-TH) OP-401; OP-402; OP-403

Initialize Traffic Monitoring Data (valid for UC only) - (INIT-STAT-TRAF) OP-404; OP-405

UID

_______________________________________

AID MONTYPE TMPER

ds1- - 1 - _______ OR iatsp- - 1 - _______ ____________ _______________

ds1- - 1 - _______ iatsp- - 1 - _______ ____________ _______________

ds1- - 1 - _______ iatsp- - 1 - _______ ____________ _______________

ds1- - 1 - _______ iatsp- - 1 - _______ ____________ _______________

ds1- - 1 - _______ iatsp- - 1 - _______ ____________ _______________

TEMPER (✓)

AID MONTYPE 1-DAY 15-MIN THLEV

iatsp - 1 - _______ _______ OR ds1 - 1 - _______ _______ ___________

iatsp - 1 - _______ _______ ds1 - 1 - _______ _______ ___________

iatsp - 1 - _______ _______ ds1 - 1 - _______ _______ ___________

iatsp - 1 - _______ _______ ds1 - 1 - _______ _______ ___________

iatsp - 1 - _______ _______ ds1 - 1 - _______ _______ ___________

AID TRAFTYPE

ALL BCO BCT BHTL TCB

uc - 1

uc - 2

uc - 3

uc - 4

uc - 5


Part 6 — Apparatus Codes363-211-128


Part 6 — Apparatus Codes 6

Table 6-14. Function/Apparatus Code Table

FunctionCode

ApparatusCode

COMDAC COM101, COM103

CTU DTP101, DTP102, DTP103, DTP104

IODS1 FAC100MDSU MSU100PRCOIN LPA350PRCOINCS LPA150COIN_FXO_CU LPA151

PROG2W LPA380LPA380C



Floor Plan Data Sheets A

Overview 1

This chapter includes a set of Floor Plan Data Sheets for the AnyMedia COT 7-foot bay and consists of four diagrams.

March 2007 A-1

Overview363-211-128


Figure A-1. Floor Plan Data Sheet - COT - Sheet 1 of 4

A-2 March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6



AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 A-3

Overview363-211-128






AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 A-5

Overview363-211-128




AC
List of Acronyms
A

A/D analog/digital

AAL ATM adaptation layer

ABN active balance network

ABSBH average busy season busy hour

AC alternating current

ACD automatic call distributor

ACE ATM circuit emulation

ACF AC fault

ACO alarm cutoff

ADPCM adaptive differential PCM

ADSL asymmetric digital subscriber line

ADSL-R ADSL transceiver unit—remote end

AFM ATM feeder multiplexer

AID access identifier

AIP access interface platform or alarm interface panel (not used as ac)

AIS alarm indication signal

AIS-L alarm indication signal-line

AIU access interface unit

ALC automatic loss control; automatic level/loss compensation

March 2007 AC-1


ALC5 automatic loss compensation—5

ALIT automatic line insulation test

AMI alternate mark inversion

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AOS AnyMedia Access System operations software

AP application pack

APOG applications, planning, and ordering guide

ARM access resource manager

ASCII American standard code for information interchange

ATM asynchronous transfer mode

ATU alarm test unit

ATU-C ADSL transceiver unit - Central Office

ATU-R ADSL transceiver unit - remote end

AWG American wire gauge

B

B8ZS bipolar with eight zeros substitution

BAIU broadband access interface unit

BB broadband

BCF battery cell fault

BDFB battery distribution fuse bay

BER bit error ratio

BIST built-in self-test

BITS building integrated timing supply

BRI basic rate interface

BRITE basic rate interface transmission extension

BT bridged tap

BVC bearer virtual channel

BVPT bearer virtual path termination

BWM broadcast warning message

AC-2 March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


C

C/N carrier-to-noise ratio

CAC connection admission control

CALRS centralized automatic loop reporting system

CASTL customer advocate system test lab

CBR constant bit rate

CC clear channel

CCITT international telephone and telegraph consultative committee

CCN customer change notice

CCS hundred call seconds

CD-ROM compact disk - read only memory

CDV cell delay variation

CDVT cell delay variation tolerance

CES circuit emulation service

CES-IWF circuit emulation service interworking function

CEV controlled environment vault

CF current feed

CHAN/MON channel testing and monitoring (switch side)

CIT craft interface terminal

CL center line

CLEC competitive local exchange carrier

CLF carrier line failure

CLP cell loss priority

CMI control mode idle

CMIS common management information service

CN change notice

CO central office

COACH customized online aid for customer help

COMDAC common data and control

COPM customer operations and program management

CORRCNT corrected HEC error counter

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 AC-3


COT central office terminal

CPE customer premises equipment

CPFT customer premises facility terminal

CPI calling party identification

CPS cabinet power system

CR critical

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CRV call reference value

CS current sink

CSA carrier serving area

CSMD/CD carrier sense multiple access/collision detection

CSS controlled slip seconds

CSS-P controlled slip seconds-path

CSU channel service unit

CTS customer technical support

CTU craft test unit

CU channel unit

CV coding violation

CV-L coding violation-line

CV-LFE coding violations-line - far end

CV-P coding violation-path

CV-S coding violations-section

CVC control virtual channel

CVPT control virtual path termination

D

DACS digital access cross-connect system

dB decibel

dBm decibel referenced to one milliwatt

DC direct current

DCD received line signal detector

DCE data communication equipment



DCLU digital carrier line unit

DCN data communication network

DCS digital cross-connect system

DCTP direct current test pair

DDL delivered data link

DDM digital data multiplexer

DDS digital data services

DFI digital facilities interface

DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol

DID direct inward dialing

DIP dual in-line package

DLC digital loop carrier

DLCI data link connection identifier

DM degraded minute

DMT discrete multitone

DMU digital measurement unit

DNIS dialed number identification service

DNS domain name service

DNUS digital network unit–subscriber

DOD direct outward dialing

DP data port or dial pulse

DPFU dual power feed unit

DPO dial pulse originate

DPT dial pulse terminate

DRAM dynamic random access memory

DS0 digital signal, level 0



DSL digital subscriber line

DSP digital signal processor

DSR DCE ready



DSU data service unit

DSX digital signal cross-connect

DSX-1 digital signal cross-connect, level 1

DSX-3 digital signal cross-connect, level 3

DTC digital trunk controller

DTE data terminal equipment

DTMF dual tone multifrequency

DU data unit

DX duplex

E

EBS enhanced business service

EC error correction

ECI equipment catalog item

E&M ear and mouth

EM element manager

EMC electromagnetic compatibility

EMF electromotive force

EMI electromagnetic interference

EMS element management system

EOC embedded operations channel

EPD echo path delay

ERL echo return loss

ES errored seconds

ES-L errored second-line

ESD electrostatic discharge

ESF extended superframe

ES-L errored seconds-line

ES-LFE errored seconds-line far end

ES-P errored seconds-path

ES-S errored seconds - section

ETO equalized transmission only



F

4TDM four-wire tandem

FC failure count

FC-L failure counts-line

FC-LFE failure counts-line - far end

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FCM fuse circuit module

FDI feeder distribution interface

FE far end

FEAC far end alarm and control

FELP far end loopback

FITL fiber in the loop

FITs failure in 109 hours

fpm flashes per minute

FPT framed path termination

FSA first site application

FSAN full service access network

FTP file transfer protocol

FX foreign exchange

FXO foreign exchange office

FXS foreign exchange station

FRMGND frameground

G

GA general availability

GCRA generic cell rate algorithm

GOS grade of service

GPB general purpose bus

GPC general purpose communications

GR-303 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Standard GR-303

GSFN generic signaling function



GSI graphical system interface

GTL Gunning transceiver logic

GTSIP global technical support information platform

H

HBER high BER

HCS header check sequence

HDBH high day busy hour

HDLC high-level data link control

HDSL high bit rate digital subscriber line

HDSL2 high bit rate digital subscriber line-second generation

HDT host digital terminal

HEC header error code

HTTP hypertext transfer protocol

Hz hertz

I

I/O input/output

IAD integrated access device

IAT integrated access terminal

IATSI IAT system interface

IBERT integrated bit error test

ICLE initial customer laboratory evaluation

ICP IMA control protocol

ID identifier

IDCU integrated digital carrier unit

IDLC integrated digital loop carrier

IDT integrated digital terminal

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

ILEC incumbent local exchange carrier

IMA inverse multiplexing for ATM



IMLT integrated mechanized loop testing

INA integrated network access

INIT initialization/diagnostic

IP Internet protocol

IPX Internet packet exchange

IS in service

ISDL integrated subscriber digital line

ISDN integrated services digital network

ISO international organization for standards

ISP Internet service providers

ITU International Telecommunications Union

IV ICP cell violation

IV-IMA IPC violations (count of errored, invalid or missing IPC cells)

IXC interexchange carrier

K

kbps kilobits per second

kBps kilobytes per second

kHz kilohertz

kW kilowatt

L

LAN local area network

LAPD link access protocol D-channel

LBO lightguide build out

LCD loss of cell delineation

LDS local digital switch

LED light-emitting diode

LFACS loop facilities assignment and control system

LFP logical feeder port

LLN logical line number

LMI local management interface



LOCD loss of cell delineation

LOF (lof) loss of frame

LOFA loss of frame alignment

LOP loss of pointer

LOS (los) loss of signal

LOST loss of signal timeout

LSAS line side answer supervision

LTD local test desk

LTF loop test frame

LTS loop test system

LULT line unit network termination

LUNT line unit network termination

LVD low voltage disconnect

M

mA milliampere

MAT Metropolitan Area T-carrier

Mbps megabits per second

MBps Megabytes per second

MBS maximum burst size

MDF main distributing frame

MDS2 metallic distribution shelf 2

MDSU metallic distribution server unit

MEA mismatch of equipment and attributes

MHz mega hertz

MIB management information base

MJ major

MLTS multiline telecommunications system

MMSU modular metallic service unit

MN minor

MR modification request

ms millisecond



MSC metallic shelf controller

MSG message switch

MTBF mean time between failures

MTU maximum transfer unit

MVEC majority vote error correction

N

NB narrowband

NCTE network channel terminating equipment

NE near end or network element

NEBS network equipment building systems

NEC national electric code

NI network interface

NIC network interface card

NMP network management protocol

NMS network management station

nrt-VBR nonreal time variable bit rate

NSA nonservice affecting

NT 1 network termination - 1

NTP network time protocol

NTT no test trunk

NTR network timing reference

NVDS nonvolatile data storage

NVPS nonvolatile program storage

O

OAM&P operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning

OAP optical application pack

OC optical carrier

OCD out of cell

OCP optical controller pack

OCU office channel unit



OE originating equipment

OHT on-hook transmission

OLIU optical line interface unit

ONU optical network unit

OOS out of service

OPS/INE operations system for intelligent network

OS operations system

OSMINE operations systems modification of intelligent network elements

OSP outside plant

OTGR operations technology generic requirements

P

P-AIS path alarm indication signal

P/AR peak to average ratio

PAM pulse amplitude modulation

PBX private branch exchange

PC personal computer

PCI peripheral component interconnect

PCM pulse code modulation

PCR peak cell rate

PDF portable document format

PDU protocol data unit

PFP physical feeder port

PGTC pair gain test controller

PIDB processor interface data bus

PLAR private line automatic ring

PLCP physical layer convergence protocol

PLN physical line number

PLR pulse line repeater

POTS plain old telephone service

ppm parts per million

PPP point to point protocol



PRC-Access Product Realization Center-Access

PRF power rectifier fault

PRI primary rate interface

PRS primary reference source

PRU power rectifier unit

PSAP public safety answering point

PSC protection switching counts

PSD power spectral density

PSDM power spectral density mask

PSES p-bit severely errored seconds

PSTN public switched telecommunications network

PTU power and test unit

PVC permanent virtual circuit

PVP permanent virtual path

Q

QMON quality monitoring

QoS quality of service

R

RACO remote alarm cutoff

RADSL rate adaptive digital subscriber line

RAI remote alarm indication

RAM random access memory

RCLK receive clock

RC/V recent change/verify

RD ring down

RDI remote defect indication

REFCLK reference clock

REN ringing equivalence number

RFI remote failure indication

RGU ringing generator unit



RIP routing information protocol

RMC remote maintenance connection

RMU remote measurement unit

ROC remote operations channel

R-S Reed-Solomon

RSF receive signal failed

RT remote terminal

rt-VBR real time variable bit rate

RTAC regional technical assistance center

RTLP receive transmission level point

RTU remote test unit

Rx-UUS-IMA receive unusable seconds-IMA

S

SA service affecting

SARTS Switched Access Remote Test System

SAS-P severely errored framing/alarm indication signal seconds-path

SCEC second channel error correction

SCR sustained cell rate

SDSL symmetric digital subscriber line

SHDSL single-pair high bit-rate digital subscriber line

SEFS severely errored framing seconds

SEFS-P severely errored framing seconds-path

SEFS-S severely errored framing seconds-section

SES severely errored seconds

SES-P severely errored second-path

SES-S severely errored seconds-section

SES-IMA severely errored seconds-IMA

SES-L severely errored seconds-line

SES-LFE severely errored seconds-line far end

SES-P severely errored seconds-path

SES-S severely errored seconds-seconds



SF superframe

shelf_PCR shelf peak cell rate

SID source identifier

SL selecting slope

SNMP simple network management protocol

SNR signal to noise ratio

SONET synchronous optical network

SWDL software download

T

TAP test access path

TAP100 test application pack

TBCU test bus control unit

TC TAP connected

TCA threshold crossing alert

TCP/IP transmission control protocol/Internet protocol

TDM time division multiplexing

TDR time domain reflectometry

TL1 transaction language -1

TL1SI TL1 system interface

TLP transmission level point or test level point

TMC timeslot management channel

TMS transmission (test) measuring set

TO transmission only

TOS test operations system

TR technical reference

TR-08 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Standard TR-008

TSA timeslot assignment

TSC test system controller

TSG timing signal generator

TSI time slot interchange

TTF transmission test facility



TTLP transmit transmission level point

Tx-UUS-IMA transmit unusable seconds-IMA

U

UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter

UAS unavailable seconds

UAS-IMA unavailable seconds-IMA

UAS-L unavailable seconds-line

UAS-LFE unavailable seconds-line far end

UAS-P unavailable seconds-path

UBR unspecified bit rate

UC universal concentrator

UCC universal communication channel

UDP user datagram protocol

U-DSL U-interface digital subscriber line

UIP user interface panel

UNCCNT uncorrected HEC error counter

UNI user network interface

UPC usage parameter control

USB universal serial bus

UPN urgent problem notification

UVG universal voice grade

V

VB virtual bank

VBR variable bit rate

VC virtual circuit (traditional DLC services) or virtual channel (ATM xDSL services)

VCC virtual channel connection

VCI virtual channel identifier

VCOT virtual central office terminal

VDC volts direct current



VDSL very high speed digital subscriber line

VF voice frequency

VFDE voice frequency data enhancement

VGA video graphics array

VoDSL voice over digital subscriber line

VOM volt ohm meter

VP virtual path

VPC virtual path connection

VPI virtual path identifier

VPN virtual private network

VPT virtual path termination

VRLA valve-regulated lead-acid

Vrms volts root mean square

VRT virtual remote terminal

VT virtual tributary

W

WAN wide area network

WATS wide area telephone service

WL working length

X

XTC extended test controller

Z

ZBS zero byte substitution

ZCS zero code suppression



GL
Glossary
Numerics

10BaseT IEEE 802.3 standard for Ethernet transmission over unshielded twisted pair.

A

Access interface platform

A family of equipment that provides cost-effective and flexible access for different services; e.g., voice and data, using a common platform.

ADSL-lite A version of asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) that is less expensive than full-rate ADSL and that operates at a lower bit rate than full-rate ADSL. This version of ADSL is specified in ITU-T G.992.2.

AFMO logical feeder port

An entity used to address a SONET path or a protection group.The logical feeder port concept allows addressing of attributes or entities that are common to all physical feeder ports associated with the logical feeder port and that are independent of simplex or duplex mode. The AFMO and the AFMDS3 have two logical feeder ports.

AFMO physical feeder port

Corresponds to the physical termination of the optical feeder. The physical feeder port concept allows the addressing of SONET physical medium, selection, and line layer entities. An AnyMedia shelf has two physical feeder ports when using one AFMO in simplex mode and four physical feeder ports when using two AFMOs in duplex mode.

AnyMedia operations gateway

Operations access for up to 20 RTs via universal communication channels (UCCs).

March 2007 GL-1


Application layer (OSI) A layer of OSIRM. Provides the management of communications between user applications. Examples include e-mail and file transfer.

Asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL)

A method of data transmission over unloaded copper loops. The data rate transmitted toward the end user is typically much higher (e.g., 6 Mbps) than the data rate transmitted by the end user (e.g., 640 Kbps).

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A high-speed connection-oriented mulitplexing and switching method that utilizes fixed-length cells to support multiple types of traffic. Transmission is synchronized at the start and end of each character, allowing different types of services to be carried over one system.

ATM adaptation layer (AAL)

A set of internationally standardized protocols and formats that define support for circuit emulation, packet video and audio, and connection-oriented and connectionless data services. There are four standard protocols defined for AAL—AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, and AAL5.AAL5 is used for bursty LAN traffic and uses the conventional five-byte ATM header. AAL5 does not support cell multiplexing.

ATM feeder The connection from the AFM to the ATM transport network. This connection may be either DS3, DS1, or OC-3c. The ATM feeder may connect directly to an ATM switch or access concentrator device. In addition, the connection between the AFM and the switch or access concentrator may incorporate a multiplexer. In daisy-chained configurations, the ATM feeder for each AFM, except the one closest to the switch or access concentrator, connects to the previous AFM in the chain. This connection may be direct or through a multiplexer. Note that daisy-chaining is available only with DS3 and OC-3c AFMs.

ATM-RSF on ADSL line Ten consecutive seconds with each second having one or more of the following anomalies:At least 18 ADSL superframes with ATM HEC anomaliesAt least one ADSL superframe with ATM cell delineation anomalies.

ATM technology Asynchronous transfer mode is a data communications format in which transmission is synchronized at the start and end of each character, allowing different types of services to be carried over one system.

Attenuation of ADSL line

The difference in dB between the power received at the far end and the power transmitted by the near end.

Authentication Process used to verify that only those users or operating systems authorized to access the system are permitted to do so and to ensure that the user or operating system is only allowed to alter or extract its authorized data.

GL-2 March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


Auto discovery Automatically updates and maintains an inventory of the AnyMedia FAST shelf.

Autonomous reports Messages sent by the AnyMedia Access System to operations systems or element managers (EMs) to report conditions such as errors, faults, and threshold crossings. The AnyMedia Access System’s processors decide when or what messages are sent; they are not externally requested.

B

Basic rate interface (BRI)

An ISDN access interface type made up of two B channels, each at 64 kbps, and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D).

B channel An ISDN bearer service channel that can carry either voice or data at a speed of 64 kbps.

Bit error ratio The quality of transmission is measured in the number of errored bits per number of bits received.

Broadband services High speed data and asynchronous transfer mode services.

C

Cell A fixed-length 53-octet packet used in ATM. The AM cell has a 5-octet header and a 48-octet payload.

Cell delay variation (CDV)

The amount of difference between a cell’s expected arrival time and its actual arrival time. Also called “jitter”.

Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)

A parameter which, in CBR transmissions, determines the level of jitter (i.e., cell delay variation). The upper bound on the jitter measurement is the CDVT.

Cell header A 5-octet header that defines control information used in processing, multiplexing, and switching cells.

Cell loss priority A field in the ATM cell header showing two levels of priority for ATM cells. CLP=0 cells are a higher priority than CLP=1 cells and may be discarded if there is a congestion to preserve the cell loss ratio of CLP=0 cells.

Cell loss ratio (CLR) The value the network agrees to offer as an objective over the lifetime of the connection. This value is specified per service class at the turn-up.

Cell transfer delay (CTD)

The transit delay of an ATM cell successfully passed between two designated boundaries on the AnyMedia Access System, when the system is loaded conservatively.

Cells received The total number of cells that the shelf received from the CPE.

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 GL-3


Channel The electronics portion of a digital loop carrier line; typically from the tip/ring output of the channel unit or application pack toward the central office. Includes up to the switch interface if integrated DLC. Includes the transmit and receive DS0s, codecs, and hybrids.

Circuit emulation service (CES)

An ATM configuration that allows the ATM network to act as a transparent transport pipe for constant bit-rate circuits.

CES interworking function (CES-IWF)

That part of a CES system that interfaces the signal to be emulated, converting such signals to ATM format in the transmit direction and converting ATM signals to the original format in the receive direction.

Circuit pack protection The capability for a given pack to relinquish its functionality to another instance of the same circuit pack. The circuit pack that provides system functionality is called the active pack, while the circuit pack that protects the active pack is called the standby pack. When a switch occurs, the roles of the active and standby circuit packs are reversed. A switch occurs, for example, when the active pack fails or when an administrator issues an OAM&P command.

ClearReach feature The ClearReach feature for the ConnectReach and ConnectReach Plus terminals that improves modem performance. The ClearReach feature requires voice frequency data enhancement (VFDE) in the AnyMedia FAST shelf.

Collocation Grouping entities in the same physical location.

Common unit A unit, or application pack, that performs the main bandwidth management and control for the AnyMedia FAST shelf.

Competitive access The ability for nonincumbent carriers to provide local access.

Configuration management

Consists of a set of functions to exercise control over elements in the network, including initialization, parameter setting, starting and stopping, and collection of information about the configuration.

Connection admission control (CAC)

CAC is a set of actions taken by the network during the call set-up phase to determine whether a connection request can be accepted, should be rejected, or may be re-allocated based on QoS definitions.

COSET The header error co-setting (55 hex by ATM standards) is used to maintain a value other than zero in the header error code (HEC) field. If the first four bytes in the header are zero, the HEC derived from these bytes is also zero. When this occurs and there are a string of zeros in the data, the receiver cannot determine the cell boundaries. Therefore, it is recommended that the value 55 hex be added to the HEC before transmission.

Craft interface terminal (CIT) port

The port on the craft test unit (CTU) where the graphical system interface (GSI) or a TL1 system interface (TL1SI) is connected.



Customer premises equipment (CPE)

Equipment that resides and is operated at a customer site.

Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

An algorithm that detects bit errors causes in data transmission.

D

D4 A framing and synchronization format for T1 transmission facilities.

Dangler cable Cable that effectively brings a backplane connector to the front of the shelf.

Database evolution When AFM software is upgraded to provide new features, it is usually necessary to adapt or extend the database structure to accommodate these features. This is done automatically as part of software activation and is termed database evolution.

Data communications (or circuit termination) equipment (DCE)

A modem or network communications interface device.

Data terminal equipment (DTE)

Data processing equipment that interfaces to the communications network (DCE).

DC alarm services Point-to-point metallic services that connect subscriber premises with fire, police, or security services’ monitoring locations. These services are delivered by the MDS2 shelf using DC circuit-emulation technology provided by MCU CUs from Tollgrade Communications, Inc.

D channel The ISDN out-of-band (16 kbps in BRI) signaling channel that carries the ISDN user signals or can be used to carry packet-mode data.

Degrowth The removal of circuit packs or traffic from a system via a provisioning operation (may be accompanied by the physical removal of associated equipment, but this is not required).

Digital bypass pair A pair of MDS2 CUs (such as the Tollgrade MCU-5405 CUs) that provide the equivalent of a metallic bypass pair without requiring a physical copper pair.

Digital data services Digital data services refer to 64 kbps clear channel digital service provided between the customer and the CO.

Digital signal 0 (DS0) One 56-kbps framed channel out of the 24 contained in a DS1 channel.

Digital signal 1 (DS1) The North American standard 1.544-Mbps digital channel.

Digital signal 3 (DS3) The North American standard 44.736-Mbps digital channel.



Distribution cable The cable from the field side of an FDI to the customer's ready access case or distribution box, but not including the drop (formal definition) or inside wiring.

Downstream direction Transmission direction from ATM data network or telephony switch to customer.

Drop Formal definition is the short cable from an aerial ready access case or buried plant distribution box to the customer's house, not including inside wiring. Informally used, especially when describing test configurations like "splitting access,” to be equal to line or loop. In this latter informal case (loop), it is all the copper cable to and including the telephone set.

Dropped cells The number of cells that are dropped as a result of exceeding either a particular connection’s traffic contract or the total allowable bandwidth of the shelf.

DS1 framing format The prescribed recurring pattern of bits transmitted that enables the receiver to identify the start of a frame and the frame number in a sequence of frames. The system supports two different DS1 frame formats, extended superframe (ESF), or superframe (SF).

DS1 link The general term DS1 link can denote a physical DS1 link when using a TDM COMDAC, or a circuit emulated link when using an ACE COMDAC.

DS1 logical feeder port These ports are associated with the VRT structure of the AnyMedia Access System. The VRT structure allows the flexible assignment of APs and CUs to VRTs that are associated with specific functional needs of partitioning the AnyMedia Access System. Three forms of VRTs are allowed: GR-303 (up to 3 allowed), TR-08 (up to 20 allowed), and INA (up to 20 allowed). The total number of VRTs and the DS1 content of each VRT are limited by the total number of DS1 physical feeder ports. Any DS1 physical feeder port can be associated with any DS1 logical feeder port.

DS1 physical feeder port

These ports provide two twisted pair transmit/receive DS1 interfaces to the AnyMedia Access System. Up to 20 DS1 physical feeder ports are available and are physically identified through the AID with the DS1 (shelf number), pack number (1 to 5), and the port number (1 to 4).

Dying gasp A message the ATU-R transmits to the ATU-C when its electrical power is being shut off. The message indicates to a service technician or an administrator that an interruption on an ADSL line was caused by a power interruption at the ATU-R and not caused by a transmission failure or an AnyMedia FAST shelf failure.



E

Errored cells received The number of cells that the shelf received from the CPE with detected errors.

ES on upstream SDSL line

The corrected HEC error counter (CORRCNT) and the uncorrected HEC error counter (UNCCNT) event counter data are accumulated and mapped to ES. The total count in one second is the number of ESs. The HEC error counter data is accumulated, and the ES counts are reported on a 15-minute and 1-day basis. The CORRCNT counter tracks the number of corrected HEC errors. The UNCCNT counter tracks the number of uncorrected HEC errors.

Ethernet A LAN that uses the CSAM/CD media access method and operates at 10 Mbps, usually over coax medium.

F

Facility protection The capability for a system to choose which signal from two facilities to pass along to the internal, unprotected transmission paths. A system switches from one facility to the other, for example, when the facility being used fails or when an administrator issues an OAM&P command.

Fault management Consists of a set of functions, such as testing, that enable the detection, isolation, and correction of abnormal operation of the telecommunications network and its environment.

Feeder cable The portion of a customer loop from the central office switch (integrated), or from the main distribution frame (MDF) to the office side of the feeder/distribution interface (FDI). In the case of DLC it includes the DLC line plus any copper cable from the RT to the FDI.

Fixed wireless network A digital loop carrier (DLC) system that uses wireless (radio) transmission through the air as the distribution medium to the home, replacing the traditional copper wire outside plant. A radio unit is mounted on the outside of the home (network interface unit) and is connected to standard twisted pair wiring within the home.

FLASH memory device A nonvolatile memory device that may be reprogrammed in the field through software download.

Framed path termination

The physical framer device on the ACE COMDAC which terminates a DS1 signal delivered by a CES-IWF. There is one framed path termination corresponding to each logical DS1 port on the ACE COMDAC.

Front and rear access The mounting of the bay with its back away from a wall, etc., which allows access to the rear of the shelves.

Front-only access The mounting of the bay with its back next to a wall, etc., which prohibits access to the rear of the shelves.



Full-rate ADSL The version of asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) defined by ANSI T1.413.

G

General user User login that allows access to all messages except those for Security Management messages that affect other users, such as login creation and deletion, and password modification for all user classes.

Generic cell rate algorithm (GCRA)

For each cell arrival the GCRA determines whether the cell conforms to the traffic contract of the connection. The GCRA is defined with two parameters: the increment (I) and the limit (L).

Generic signaling function

A parameter required for provisioning of subscriber service. The generic signaling function is used to condition the AnyMedia FAST shelf loop interface circuit to provide the desired signaling protocol. The values are based on Network Channel Interface (NCI) codes described in Telcordia Technologies, Inc. TR-TSY-000335.

GET The simple network management protocol (SNMP) operation used by the OS to retrieve specified information such as the values of MIB variables.

Global ATM parameters Includes the FAST shelf VPIs and the ATM operations channel VPI and VCI (also known as ATM OAM&P PVC).

Graphical system interface (GSI)

The GSI is part of the Management Interface package of software that is an interface to control and maintain the AnyMedia FAST shelf telephony and data services and subshelves.

H

Hi-cap High capacity (hi-cap) subscriber services direct DS1 paths from subscriber equipment to the serving CO.

High BER on ADSL line Ten consecutive seconds with each second having one or more of the following anomalies:At least 18 ADSL superframes with ADSL CRC anomaliesAt least 0.1 seconds in which the received power has dropped to 6 dB below the reference powerAt least one ADSL superframe with synchronization anomalies.



High BER on upstream SDSL line

The SDSL signal received from the CPE is considered to be in a high-BER condition when ten consecutive SESs have occurred. The high-BER condition is cleared when ten consecutive seconds have occurred that are not SESs. The system tracks SESs for the SDSL signal received from the CPE. An SES for upstream SDSL transmission is observed when either of the following conditions exists during a given clock second:If the number of HEC errors (corrected and uncorrected) divided by the number of cells received is greater than or equal to 0.3, then SES occurs.If at least one los or lof occurs, then SES occurs. If an auto change in bit rate occurs, start over in both cases.

High bit rate digital subscriber line (HDSL)

A method of transmitting T1 over twisted-pair copper lines. Unlike other DSL types, HDSL uses four wires (two pairs). HDSL supports 1.544 Mbps full-duplex transmission.

I

IAT01 IAT01 indicates an IAT type supported by a proprietary (modified D4) interface such as ConnectReach and ConnectReach Plus terminals.

IAT02 IAT02 indicates an IAT type supported by a D4 open interface.

IATSI view A window available on the GSI that is launched by executing the ACT-IAT TL1 command.

IMA group An operational collection of IMA links that functions to multiplex and de-multiplex ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among the links, to form a higher bandwidth logical path between a pair of IMA terminals separated by multiple feeders. The AFMDS1 pack uses one group and up to eight links, with a direct, one-to-one mapping between the links and feeders.

IMA link A circuit path within the AFMDS1 that connects its feeder interface with a circuit that combines the link’s broadband payload (ATM cells) with the payload of other links, in the downstream direction, and distributes the composite ATM payload cells among the links in the upstream direction.

Integrated access device (IAD)

A device on the customer premises that consolidates traffic from several subscriber interfaces into a single pipe. Often, the pipe connects to a host terminal that consolidates traffic from several IADs into a larger pipe.

Integrated configuration

A remote terminal (RT) connected to a local digital switch (LDS) digital interface without a central office terminal (COT).

Integrated Mechanized Loop Testing (IMLT)

IMLT is a feature of the 5ESS switch that allows LoopCare (formerly MLT) to use the directly connected test unit (DCTU) of the 5ESS switch to make metallic tests on subscriber loops (including those on digital loop carrier systems).



Integrated services digital network (ISDN)

CCITT I-series recommendation that defines the digital network standard for integrated voice and data network access and services and user-network messages.

Inventory management Consists of a set of functions to track, report, and ensure adequate supplies of equipment.

L

Latency In the AnyMedia Access System, this parameter is used to choose whether or not interleaving is used on an ADSL circuit. If the latency parameter is set to Interleaved, then interleaving is used. If the Latency parameter is set to Fast, then interleaving is not used. This parameter is called Latency because the amount of transmission delay through an ADSL transmission span is affected by interleaving.

Legacy services A large set of service types traditionally supported by the DLC network element (NE).

Lightguide build out (LBO)

An attenuation network for optical signals between ATM circuit packs in an ATM switch or multiplexer and the AFMOs in an AnyMedia shelf, or between separate AMFOs in multiple AnyMedia shelves in a daisy chain. LBO guarantees the proper signal level.

Line Formally represents the connection from the customer's telephone to the switch. Has been recently used to represent the copper cable from the DLC channel unit's or application pack's tip/ring output to the customer's telephone. Used equivalent to "loop," but usually does not include the telephone set.

Local login Login into the AnyMedia Access System via the CIT or External System LAN 10BaseT interface from the collocated GSI or dumb terminal.

Local test desk LTD is a test position located in a local end office that is capable of accessing and making metallic tests on subscriber loops served out of that office (including those on digital loop carrier systems).

LOF on ADSL line ADSL frame synchronization has been lost at the ADSL for at least 2.5 seconds.

LOF on upstream SDSL line

The SDSL signal from the CPE is considered to be in a LOF condition after 2.5 ± 0.5 seconds of contiguous lof defect. The LOF condition is cleared when 10 ± 0.5 seconds have occurred that do not have the lof defect. The loss of cell delineation (LOCD) event counter data is mapped to lof. The firmware collects this 0.5-second interval data. If there are 2.5 seconds of contiguous lof, it is considered to be LOF. This LOCD event counter data is accumulated and reported on a 15-minute and 1-day basis.



Logical feeder port An entity used to address a SONET path or a protection group. The logical feeder port concept allows addressing of attributes or entities that are common to all physical feeder ports associated with the logical feeder port and that are independent of simplex or duplex mode. The AFMO has two logical feeder ports.

Logical ports Port assignments made through software, as opposed to actual, physical ports.

Loop Formally represents the connection from the customer's telephone to the switch. Has been recently used to represent the copper cable from the DLC channel unit's or application pack's tip/ring output to the customer's telephone. Used equivalent to "line," but may include the telephone set also.

LoopCare LoopCare (formerly called MLT) is a Tollgrade testing operations system capable of making both narrowband and broadband tests on subscriber lines and of analyzing and reporting the results of these tests.

LOS on ADSL line Received power has dropped to 6 dB below the reference power. The timing threshold is as follows:Downstream: 1.5 secondsUpstream: 2.5 seconds.

LOS on upstream SDSL line

The loss of signal interrupts are timed, accumulated, and stored and are mapped to los. The loss of signal timeout (LOST) is used to time the los. If the LOST bit is set, then it is a LOS condition. The firmware collects this data, accumulates it, and reports the number of los occurrences on a 15-minute and 1-day basis. The LOS failure parameter is the accumulated los.

M

Management Interface The Management Interface is a package of software that is used for managing traditional DLC services and ATM xDSL services.The Management Interface allows the user to provision a single NE at a time through its GSI, while simultaneously monitoring alarms of multiple NEs through its Network Maintenance Manager. It is installed on a personal computer running under the Windows operating system.

Management information base (MIB)

Declaration of a collection of objects that defines the network or network element (NE) for a given interface protocol. For example, there is a MIB defined for access using the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and a different MIB defined for access using the protocol of the GR-303 Embedded Operations Channel (EOC).



Maximum burst size (MBS)

Specifies the largest burst of data above the insured rate that will be allowed temporarily on an ATM PVC, but will not be dropped at the edge by the traffic policing function, even if it exceeds the maximum rate.In the signaling message, the burst tolerance is conveyed through the MBS, which is coded as a number of cells. The burst tolerance together with the sustainable cell rate and the generic cell rate algorithm determine the MBS that may be transmitted at the peak rate and still be in conformance with the generic cell rate algorithm.

Metallic bypass pair A physical copper pair running between the CO and the RT site that allows a test head located at the CO to perform metallic tests on RT subscriber drops.

Minimum bit rate The minimum rate at which the ADSL and SDSL and SHDSL link will train, upstream and downstream. This rate is used to in determining whether a new connection can be admitted to the shelf.

Mismatch of equipment and attributes (MEA) alarm

This alarm signals that the equipped pack and its provisioning do not match. The alarm is cleared either by deleting the cross-connect or by replacing the pack with one that supports the service category.

Multiplexing The technique of combining multiple single channels onto a single aggregate channel for sharing facilities and bandwidth.

Multi-point grounding The circuit and frame (earth) grounds are tied together at each piece of equipment. This allows battery return to use the building ground as a path. Multi-point grounding is also called mesh, integrated ground plane, or common bonding network . (See single-point grounding.)

N

Narrowband services Services include voice and voice-frequency data transmission.

NE name The network element (NE) name is a unique provisioned name given to an AnyMedia shelf. This name is identified by the GSI as the site ID.

Network Maintenance Manager

The Network Maintenance Manager is part of the Management Interface package of software that is used to monitor alarms over multiple NEs. The Network Maintenance Manager allows a user to choose which NEs to monitor, to filter viewed alarms, and to manage the display of these alarms

Non-real time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR)

A service category for data traffic that has no fixed timing relationships but has a guaranteed QoS. Statistical multiplexing is provided to make optimum use of network resources.

Nonvolatile data storage (NVDS)

That part of the database which is retained even after a power failure, for example, provisioning parameters.



Nonvolatile program storage (NVPS)

Nonvolatile memory on the COMDAC and the AFM used to store the load image.

O

OLIU The optical line interface unit (OLIU) circuit pack is used in the FiberReach shelf.The OLIU interfaces with an optical line in the transmit and receive directions and supports DDM-2000 FiberReach self-healing ring configurations through its time slot interchange (TSI) capabilities. For specific information on the OLIU, see the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide, 363-206-300.

Open systems interconnection reference model (OSIRM)

A seven-layer model that defines the protocol standards for data communications.

Operations system (OS)

A centralized system of software and/or hardware for remotely testing or administering telecommunications equipment (e.g., SARTS, LoopCare [formerly MLT], OPS/INE, etc.)

Optical carrier level N (OC-N)

The optical carrier level signal in SONET that results from an STS-N signal conversion. In SONET, the basic transmission speed unit is 58.34 Mbps.

Overlay solutions Additional infrastructure to carry new services.

P

Packet switch public data network (PSPDN)

A public data network that utilizes packet switching technology (X.25, SMDS, ATM).

Partial packet discard (PPD)

In severe ATM traffic congestion, the traffic manager discards packets arriving from any connection, regardless of whether or not the traffic on the connection is exceeding its bandwidth. The traffic manager discards all remaining cells in the packet, even if the severe congestion clears in the meantime.

Peak cell rate (PCR) A traffic parameter measured in cells per second that specifies the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted on an ATM network. PCR defines the shortest period between two cells.

Performance management

Consists of a set of functions to evaluate and report on the behavior of telecommunication equipment and the effectiveness of the network and/or network elements (NEs).

Permanent virtual circuit (PVC)

A logical dedicated circuit between two user ports in a point-to-point configuration.



Physical feeder port Corresponds to the physical termination of the optical feeder. The physical feeder port concept allows the addressing of SONET physical medium, section, and line layer entities. An AnyMedia shelf has two physical feeder ports when using one AFMO in simplex mode and four physical feeder ports when using two AFMOs in duplex mode.

Physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP)

The IEEE 802.6 standard that defines the physical layer that adapts the actual capabilities of the underlying physical network to provide the services required by the ATM layer.

Private (automatic) branch exchange (PBX/PABX)

A customer-site telephone switch.

Privileged user User login allows access to all TL1 commands and GSI capabilities.

Protected pack A circuit pack for which there is a backup. Protection may be one-to one, or it may be one-to-more-than-one (1:n).

Protection switching A reliability feature that causes service to switch to the backup equipment during faults or testing.

PSD of ADSL transmission

The actual ADSL transmit power level. This value may be lower than the provisioned PSDM.

PSDM of ADSL transmission

A provisionable value representing the maximum allowed ADSL transmit power level. The ADSL transceiver may choose a lower power level based on line conditions.

Pulse code modulation (PCM)

Modulation in which an analog signal is sampled and the sample is quantized and coded. Standard North American sampling is 8,000 times per second with 8 bits representing each sample pulse, giving a transmission rate of 64 kbps.

Q

Quality of service (QoS) An indicator of the performance of a transmission system on the Internet and other networks. QoS is measured in transmission rate, error rates, latency, and other characteristics.

R

Real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR)

A service category with strict cell transfer and delay variation demands and cell loss requirements.

Remote login Login into the AnyMedia Access System via IAO LAN, ROC, or External System LAN (over TCP/IP DCN) from OSs, EM, or GSI.

Reports-only user - broadband

User login that allows access to GET messages for retrieving system information and autonomous reports. Reports-only users do not have access to any SNMP messages that create, change or remove service or to any security messages that affect other users.



Reports-only user - narrowband

User login that allows access to a limited set of TL1 messages, for retrieving system information and autonomous messages. Reports-only users do not have access to any TL1 messages that create, change or remove service to any security messages that affect other users.

RFI on ADSL line ADSL frame synchronization has been lost at the ATU-R for at least 1.5 seconds.

Right-of-way Permission to have access to specified local network and to use a specific portion of it.

Ring A closed-loop, common bus network topology.

Router A LAN/WAN device that operates at layers 1 (physical), 2 (data link), and 3 (network) of the OSIRM. Distinguished from a bridge by its capability to switch and route data based upon network protocols such as IP.

S

Sealing current 5 mA current used (historically) to prevent oxidation buildup ontip/ring pairs.

Security management Consists of a set of functions that protect telecommunications networks and systems from unauthorized access by persons, acts, or influences, and to track and report access attempts.

SET The simple network management protocol (SNMP) operation used by the OS to change the value of specified information such as a MIB variable.

Shelf daisy-chain Connecting AnyMedia FAST shelves to daisy-chain AFMs together for ADSL services only.

Shelf overbooking factor

Overbooking means allocating bandwidth to connections on a port, where their total bandwidth allocation is greater than bandwidth minus CAC Reserve. Booking can exceed bandwidth and also the bandwidth of the port, but traffic throughput can never exceed bandwidth.

Simple network management protocol (SNMP)

Used by the OS and the GCT for the AnyMedia FAST shelf broadband product for accessing the MIB objects.

Single-pair high bit-rate digital subscriber line (SHDSL)

A physical layer technology used to transport digital bit stream over one pair of nonloaded existing copper distribution cable. SHDSL provides equal transmission bit rates for both the upstream and downstream directions ranging from 192 to 2304 kbps. SHDSL is based on use of the TC-PAM line coding scheme. TC-PAM is a baseband line coding scheme that does not allow the option to share the copper loop from a baseband POTS signal.



Single-point grounding The circuit and frame (earth) grounds are tied together at a single specific point of the central office. This does not allow the battery return to use the building ground as a path. Single-point grounding is also called floating point, isolated ground plane, or isolated bonding network. (See multi-point grounding.)

Site ID A unique provisioned name given to an AnyMedia shelf. This name is identified by the Navis AnyMedia EMS as the NE name.

SNR margin of ADSL line

The increase in noise, relative to the current received noise power, that can occur with a BER of 10-7 still being met.

Software upgrade Installing newer system software.

Standby A backup circuit pack or system entity that may be activated during a equipment failure or testing.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)

The average cell transmission rate in ATM, measured in cells per second and converted internally to bits per second. Usually, SCR is a fraction of the peak cell rate.

Switch consolidation Grouping telecommunications lines (increasing density) for better efficiency, ease of maintenance, reduced cost, space, etc.

Symmetric digital subscriber line (SDSL)

A physical layer technology used to transport digital bit stream over one pair of nonloaded existing copper distribution cable. SDSL provides equal transmission bit rates for both the upstream and downstream directions ranging from 144 to 2320 kbps. SDSL is based on use of the 2B1Q line coding scheme. 2B1Q-SDSL is a baseband line coding scheme that does not allow the option to share the copper loop from a baseband POTS signal.

Synchronous optical network (SONET)

A United States high-speed, fiber-optic transport standard for a fiber-optic digital hierarchy (speeds range from 51.84 Mbps to 2.4 Gbps).

T

T1 A four-wire repeater system; commonly used to refer to a DS1 signal.

T1 carrier The TDM digital T1 hierarchy used in North America and Japan with 24 voice channels constituting a single 1.544-Mbps T1 trunk.

TDR testing A type of wideband metallic drop test in which a test head sends a narrow-width pulse over a subscriber loop and looks for any returned pulses that were reflected back from the loop.

Test operations system Any of a number of testing systems used to perform channel and drop testing, such as the Tollgrade LoopCare (formerly MLT) system and PGTC-compatible test systems for channel testing.



Threshold crossing alert

A threshold is a value assigned by the system user to a certain desired level (e.g., errored seconds); when the level is exceeded, a threshold crossing alert is issued.

Tier 2 NMS A generic term for a network management system that can manage multiple kinds of network elements as a connected network. Tier 3 refers to element managers and Tier 1 refers to customer service support systems.

Time domain reflectometry (TDR) testing

A type of wideband metallic drop test in which a test head sends a narrow-width pulse over a subscriber loop and looks for any returned pulses that were reflected back from the loop.

TL1 system interface (TL1SI)

Any ASCII terminal connected to a port via an EIA-232E/574 format that uses TL1 commands to turn up a system and perform maintenance, provisioning, and other system operations.

TL1SI view A window available in the GSI by launching a TL1SI view window though the GSI of the AnyMedia Management Interface.

Token A marker that indicates the station’s right to transmit that can be held by a station on a token ring or bus.

Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)

The combination of a network and transport protocol developed by ARPANET for internetworking IP-based networks.

TRAP The simple network management protocol (SNMP) operation used by a network element (NE) to send an autonomous report.

Twisted pair (TP) The basic transmission medium consisting of 22 to 26 American wire gauge (AWG) insulated copper wire. TP can be either shielded (STP) or unshielded (UTP).

U

Universal communication channel (UCC)

A DS0 communications path between a COT and an RT of a universal AnyMedia Access System. The UCC is used as a LAN extension to allow a remote operations system to provision and monitor the RT via a COT that is connected to the data communications network.

Universal Concentrator The Universal (COT-RT) Concentrator (UC) is supported by a special software for COT and RT, and by a FXO AP (LPA151) at the COT. The UC allows a drop/feeder-DS0 concentration ratio from about 1:1 to 20:1. At the RT, the existing APs that support LS, GS, and COIN can be used to support the UC.

Universal configuration A remote terminal (RT) connected to a central office terminal (COT) capable of providing an analog interface to a local analog or digital switching system.



Unspecified bit rate (UBR)

An ATM service category where traffic is allocated whatever bandwidth is available at any given time. UBR does not have a pre-connection negotiated bandwidth and there are no guarantees in terms of cell loss rate and delay.

Unstructured data transfer mode (UDT)

One of the two AAL1 modes of data transfer. When using it, the circuit emulation service (CES) acts as a transparent pipe for the DS1 signal, passing all its bits while trying to maintain bit sequence integrity and bit count.

Upstream direction Transmission direction from customer to ATM data network or telephony switch.

User security classes Refers to different user groups, each assigned with certain system access privileges. See Privileged User, General User, and Reports-only User definitions.

User-to-network interface (UNI)

The point at which the user accesses the network.

V

Variable bit rate (VBR) A service category that supports variable bit rate data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters.

Virtual channel (VC) A virtual link defined at an ATM interface. The lower of the two levels of cell multiplexing defined for ATM.

Virtual channel connection (VCC)

The sum of all the unidirectional virtual channel links traveled by an ATM payload from its originating point to its user destination.

Virtual circuit (VC) A voice communications link that appears to the user to be a dedicated point-to-point circuit.

Virtual connection A connection between end-users in which data may be passed over various circuit configurations during a single period of communication. Virtual circuits are generally set up on a per-call basis and are disconnected when the call is terminated.

VF cables Refers generically to the tip/ring pair cables that attach to the faceplates of all APs, including the telephony and ATM xDSL APs.

VF growth Increased demand for voice frequency capacity.

virtual DS1 feeder CES does not use physical DS1 feeders (as are used in a TDM COMDAC configuration). With CES, the functionality formerly provided by physical DS1 feeders is performed by ATM circuit emulation, a “virtual” DS1 feeder capability which is also called a framed path termination (fpt).

Virtual channel identifier (VCI)

A sixteen-bit field in the ATM cell header that uniquely identifies the virtual channel link with which the cell is associated. This identifier is of local significance only. It provides the lower of two levels of multiplexing.



Virtual path identifier (VPI)

In ATM, a field within the cell header that is used to switch virtual paths, defined as groups of virtual channels (VCs).

Voice frequency data enhancement (VFDE)

The feature of the AnyMedia FAST shelf that enhances the GR-303 interface to improve modem performance. Also see ClearReach feature.

Voice over DSL (VoDSL)

An application requiring a gateway that converts the voice signal from a digital switch to ATM format for transport toward the customer premises. Special CPE is required at the customer premises to provide the voice service.

Volatile data storage Data storage (e.g., RAM, that will lose information when power is lost).

Virtual path (VP) A virtual link defined at an ATM interface. The higher of the two levels of multiplexing defined for ATM. Used to transport an aggregation of virtual channels (VCs) between network locations in a manner somewhat analogous to a DS3 transporting multiple DS1s.

Virtual path identifier (VPI)

An eight-bit field in the ATM cell header that uniquely identifies the virtual path link with which the cell is associated. This identifier is of local significance, across an ATM interface. It distinguishes the data of one virtual path from the data of another, thus providing the higher of two levels of multiplexing.

W

Wide area network (WAN)

A network that operates over a large region and commonly uses carrier facilities and services.

Wire center consolidation

Grouping a number of central offices into one center.

X

xDSL Refers to a variety of DSL services, such as HDSL, HDSL2, SDSL, SHDSL, and ADSL.



Index

Numerics

10BaseT interface, 4-8

A

alarm cutoffcentral office

remote alarm, 4-19alarm output closures, 4-18alarms

autonomous alarm reporting, 5-38central office terminal (COT), integrated network access interfaces, 5-36classification, 5-33equipment alarms, 5-33facility alarms, 5-34Fault Management, 5-33GSI interface, 5-36inhibit and resume, 5-38LEDs (visual indicators), 5-37local (CO), 5-37operations system, 5-36remote, 5-37reporting and retrieving, 5-36severity level, 5-38synchronization, 5-34TL1 system interface, 5-36TR-08, 5-36

AnyMedia Access Systemalarm output closures, 4-18capacity

TR-08 VCOT, 6-3central office terminal, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4circuit pack dimensions, 3-6COT, 3-6FAST shelf functional block diagram, 3-6Fault Management testing, 5-42features and benefits, 1-1growth, 6-6loopback tests, 5-42shelf features and functions, 3-2software management, 5-3turn-up tests, 5-42universal concentrator, 1-5, 4-2, 4-6

apparatus codes, 3-10application pack

growth scenario, 6-6provisioning, 5-16

ATUcables, 2-8description, 3-11PGTC testing, 6-58

AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6 March 2007 I-1


B

backplaneringing, 6-54

bayATU, 2-9components, 2-4DSX-1 cross-connect panel, 2-9MDS2 shelf, 2-10power consumption, 2-8power plant, 2-8transport equipment, 2-9

C

central officealarm output closures, 4-18bay arrangements, 2-3

central office terminalAnyMedia Access System, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4ATU cables, 2-8cables, 2-7DS1 cables, 2-7output alarm cables, 2-8ringing cables, 2-8voice frequency cables, 2-7

central office terminal (COT)alarms, 5-36ATU, 6-58local metallic test, 6-58PGTC testing, 6-58testing, 6-58

digital bypass pair, 6-59metallic bypass pair, 6-59RTU-2 at the AnyMedia Access System RT site, 6-59

channel unitspairing and compatibility, 3-21provisioning, 5-16

circuit testingexternal interfaces, 4-16

CIT port, 6-50COMDAC COM101

nonvolatile program storage, 5-3protection switching, 5-39

Configuration Managementapplication pack and channel unit provisioning, 5-16line termination provisioning, 5-11operations, 4-13provisioning, 5-10service activation, 5-4software management, 5-3system activities, 5-2

COTAnyMedia Access System, 3-6

COT FAST shelf

I-2 March 2007 AnyMedia COT FS, Issue 6


functional block diagram, 3-6COT. See central office terminal

D

data sheetsfloor plan, A-1

degrowthscenario, 6-9system, 6-7

detection strategy, 5-30digital bypass pair

COT testing, 6-59universal configuration, 6-61

documentpurpose, xvii

DS1extended superframe, 6-45feeder interface, 6-44Performance Management, 5-44superframe, 6-45

duplex modenonvolatile program storage, 5-3program storage, 5-3

E

engineeringmixed configurations, 5-12ROC connection, 6-16

Engineering Work Order, 6-68equipment alarms, 5-33extended superframe

DS1 frame format, 6-45

F

facility alarms, 5-34FAST shelf

circuit pack dimensions, 3-6FCM, 3-5features and functions, 3-2fusing, 6-55

Fault Managementactivities, 5-29alarms, 5-33maintenance, 5-30operations, 4-13, 4-14protection switching, 5-39

FCMdirect power and duplicated power, 6-53FAST shelf, 3-5



floor plan data sheets, A-1free-running mode, 6-48fusing

FAST shelf, 6-55

G

graphical system interfacehelp, 6-51local access, 4-11

requirements, 6-50overview, 4-10PDF Viewer, 6-51remote access

requirements, 6-50TL1 system interface view, 6-51Web browsers, 6-50

groundingFAST shelf, 6-56

growthapplication pack, 6-6IODS1 circuit pack growth, 6-7MDS2 shelf, 6-7scenario examples, 6-7scenarios, 6-6

GSI interfacealarms and status, 5-36

GSI. See graphical system interface

I

integrated network accessalarms, 5-36interface, 4-5support, 4-5virtual remote terminal, 4-2

interfaceCO/remote alarm output closures, 4-18DS1, 6-44external for circuit testing, 4-16INA virtual bank, 4-5OAM&P, 4-8power and miscellaneous alarm input, 4-17TR-08, 4-4

IODS1 FAC100protection switching, 5-40

IPROC address, 6-16

isolation strategy, 5-31



L

LAN connectioninterface, 4-8

laptop personal computerrequirements, 6-50

LEDalarms, 5-37

line termination provisioningConfiguration Management, 5-11

local access, 6-50graphical system interface (GSI), 6-50

local metallic testCOT, 6-58

loopback tests, 5-42

M

maintenancedetection, 5-30Fault Management, 5-30isolation, 5-31proactive maintenance, 5-32recovery, 5-32reporting, 5-31

Management Interface, 4-10graphical system interface (GSI), 4-10PC requirements, 6-50

matrix for COT and RT CU and AP pairs, 3-21MDS2 shelf

bay description, 2-10channel unit pairing and compatibility, 3-21channel units available for COT and RT configurations, 3-24growth scenario, 6-7

metallic bypass pairCOT testing, 6-59

miscellaneous alarm contact closure, 4-17

N

Network Maintenance Managerdescription, 4-14operations, 4-14selections, 4-14

network synchronization, 6-47nonswitched services, 1-11nonvolatile program storage

duplex mode, 5-3simplex mode, 5-3software management, 5-3

NVPS. See nonvolatile program storage



O

online documentationgraphical system interface (GSI), 6-51

operations on graphical system interfaceConfiguration Management, 4-13Performance Management, 4-14Security Management, 4-14

operations on graphical system interfaceIFault Management, 4-14

operations systemalarms interface, 5-36

operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P)interfaces, 4-8

OS. See operations system

P

PC. See personal computerPerformance Management

activities, 5-44operations, 4-13, 4-14

personal computer requirementsfor GSI, 6-50hardware, 6-50software, 6-50

PGTC testingCOT, 6-58

powerdistribution, 6-53drain on FAST shelf, 6-57FAST shelf, 6-53options, 6-53

PRCOINCS LPA150faceplate, 3-15, 3-19features and functions, 3-14, 3-17functional block diagram, 3-14, 3-17LED indicators, 3-16, 3-20

proactive maintenance, 5-32program storage

COMDAC COM101, 5-3protection switching

COMDAC packs, 5-39Fault Management, 5-39IODS1 packs, 5-40network elements, 5-39synchronization sources, 5-40

provisioningapplication pack, 5-16channel unit, 5-16Configuration Management, 5-10



R

recovery strategy, 5-32reliability, 6-52remote access, 6-50

graphical system interface (GSI), 6-50TCP/IP, 4-14

remote telemetry systemalarm output closures, 4-18

reporting strategy, 5-31ringing, 6-54ringing filter assembly, 6-55ROC connection

engineering, 6-16RTU-2, 6-65RTU-2 at the AnyMedia Access System RT site

COT testing, 6-59

S

Security Managementoperations, 4-13, 4-14

self-tests, 5-42service activation

Configuration Management, 5-4services

nonswitched, 1-11special services, 3-24switched, 1-11

shelfringing, 6-54

simplex modenonvolatile program storage, 5-3program storage, 5-3

softwaredeploying a new software release, 5-3

software managementConfiguration Management, 5-3

SONET, 6-48See DDM-2000

special services, 3-24superframe

DS1, 6-45switched services, 1-11synchronization, 6-47

alarms, 5-34Configuration Management, 5-25external composite clock, 6-47external DS1 timing, 6-47free-running mode, 6-48provisioning, 5-25

system planning and engineering. See Chapter 10



T

TCP/IP interface, 6-16test

circuit testing, 5-43diagnosis, 5-43Fault Management, 5-42loopbacks, 5-42self-tests, 5-42services supported, 5-42turn-up tests, 5-42voice frequency, 5-43

testingcentral office terminal (COT), 6-58

TL1 system interface, 6-51graphical system interface (GSI), 6-51

TL1 system interface (TL1SI)alarms interface, 5-36

TL1SI. See TL1 system interfaceTR-08

alarms, 5-36interfaces, 4-4virtual remote terminal, 4-2

TR-08 VCOTcapacity, 6-3interface, 4-4

TR-465compatible testing, 6-58

traditional DLC servicesdescription, xx

turn-up tests, 5-42

U

UC VCOTcapacity, 6-5line termination, 5-11Universal concentrator configuration, 6-5

UC VCOT/ VRTcapacity, 1-7Universal concentrator configuration, 1-7

Universal concentrator configuration, 6-5universal configuration

digital bypass pair, 6-61

V

VF cables, 2-7virtual remote terminal

integrated network access, 4-2TR-08, 4-2types of interfaces, 4-2



voice frequencytest, 5-43

VRT. See virtual remote terminal

W

Web browsersgraphical system interface (GSI), 6-50
